advertisement
MA00822 2005-11
H-Designer
Reference Manual
English
Foreword
H-Designer Reference Manual
Foreword
This manual is a description of H-Designer, the configuration tool used tocreate applications for the operator terminals in the H-series.
The manual assumes that the most recent versions of the system program (firmware) and configuration tool are used.
The operator terminal can be connected to many types of automation equipment, such as PLCs, servo and drives. In this document the expression “the controller” is used as a general term for the connected equipment.
Beijer Electronics AB, MA00822, 2005-11
All examples in this manual are only intended to improve understanding of the functionality and handling of the equipment. Beijer Electronics AB cannot assume any liability if these examples are used in real applications.
In view of the wide range of applications for this software, users must acquire sufficient knowledge themselves in order to ensure that it is correctly used in their specific application. Persons responsible for the application and the equipment must themselves ensure that each application is in compliance with all relevant requirements, standards and legislation in respect to configuration and safety.
Beijer Electronics AB will accept no liability for any damage incurred during the installation or use of this equipment.
Beijer Electronics AB prohibits all modification, changes or conversion of the equipment.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Contents
Contents
Installation Procedure ....................................................................... 10
H-Designer Programming Environment ........................................... 13
Open and Close ................................................................................ 15
Save and Save as................................................................................ 15
Upload Application and Download Application From...................... 16
Upload Recipes and Download Recipes ............................................ 16
Reconstruct Source ........................................................................... 17
Find/Replace Address........................................................................ 19
Decompose Shape............................................................................. 22
Align and Make Same Size ................................................................ 23
Nudge and Layer .............................................................................. 24
Group and Ungroup ......................................................................... 24
Object Attributes .............................................................................. 25
State/Text Management.................................................................... 26
View Menu ....................................................................................... 30
Whole Screen and Whole Screen With I/O Labels............................ 30
Language 1-5 .................................................................................... 30
Zoom In, Normal and Zoom Out .................................................... 31
Screen Menu..................................................................................... 32
New Screen....................................................................................... 32
Screen Manager ................................................................................ 32
Cut/Copy/Delete Current Screen and Paste Screen........................... 36
OPEN Macro, CLOSE Macro and CYCLIC Macro......................... 36
Screen Properties............................................................................... 37
Draw Menu ...................................................................................... 44
Geometric Shapes ............................................................................. 44
Object Menu .................................................................................... 56
Creating Objects ............................................................................... 56
Specifying Object Properties ............................................................. 57
Numeric Entry.................................................................................. 73
Character Entry ................................................................................ 76
Drop Down List ............................................................................... 79
Numeric Display............................................................................... 85
Beijer Electronics, MA00822 I
II
Contents
2.7.11 Message Display Objects ...................................................................88
Library Menu ..................................................................................132
Bitmap Library ................................................................................132
Font Library ....................................................................................134
Save as Shape...................................................................................135
Shape Library Manager....................................................................135
Application Menu ...........................................................................138
Workstation Setup ..........................................................................138
Alarm Setup ....................................................................................143
Slide-out Menu ...............................................................................144
System Message ...............................................................................145
Download Application and Download Firmware and Application...149
File Protection.................................................................................150
Tool Menu......................................................................................150
2.10.2 Off-line and On-line Simulation .....................................................153
Options Menu.................................................................................155
2.11.5 Default Screen Background Style.....................................................156
2.11.8 Numeric Keypad Setup ...................................................................157
Window Menu................................................................................158
Help Menu......................................................................................159
Recipe Operation Steps ...................................................................162
Recipe Controlled by Controller......................................................165
Recipe Controlled by Operator Terminal ........................................168
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Contents
Control Block ................................................................................. 172
Screen Number Register.................................................................. 172
Command Flag Register.................................................................. 174
Logging Buffer Control Registers: LBCRs....................................... 176
RCPNO Number Register: RNR.................................................... 179
General User Area Register.............................................................. 179
Determine the Control Block Size .................................................. 179
Screen Status Register ..................................................................... 180
General Status Register ................................................................... 180
Logging Buffer Status Registers (LBSRs)......................................... 182
RCPNO Image Register.................................................................. 182
Recipe Register Block...................................................................... 183
Recipe Register Number - Enhanced Operator Terminals............... 183
Addressing Recipe Data - Enhanced Operator Terminals................ 184
Time Block ..................................................................................... 185
The Operator Terminal Writes to the Controller............................ 185
The Controller Writes to the Operator Terminal............................ 186
Read Cycle...................................................................................... 186
5 Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port......................................................... 187
Communication Parameters............................................................ 188
Communication Efficiency ............................................................. 190
Important Notes ............................................................................. 191
Connection ..................................................................................... 193
IP Address Setup............................................................................. 193
Application Upload/Download over Ethernet ................................. 194
Communication with Ethernet-enabled controllers......................... 196
Multi-Link - One Master and Multiple Slaves................................. 197
Cross-Link over Ethernet (Data Sharing) ........................................ 200
7 Multi-Channel Communication.................................................................. 205
Connection ..................................................................................... 205
Connection Setup ........................................................................... 206
Read/Write Address Setup .............................................................. 210
Beijer Electronics, MA00822 III
IV
Contents
Macro Function ..............................................................................211
Macro Classifications.......................................................................211
Application Macros .........................................................................211
Screen Macros .................................................................................211
ON/OFF Macros ............................................................................212
Sub-Macros .....................................................................................212
Macro Commands...........................................................................213
Data transfer....................................................................................216
Comparison ....................................................................................216
Flow Control...................................................................................220
Data Conversion .............................................................................221
Internal Memory .............................................................................226
9 Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller .....................227
Allen Bradley Micrologic 1000/1500...............................................228
Allen Bradley PLC-5 .......................................................................230
Allen Bradley SLC-503/504 ............................................................233
Allen Bradley IQ Master Servo Controller .......................................236
ABB Comli (Slave Mode) ................................................................237
Computer (as Master/Slave/V2/Null) /Modbus Master ...................238
Delta DVP ......................................................................................239
Ero TFS/THS/LFS..........................................................................240
Facon FB.........................................................................................241
Festo FPC .......................................................................................243
GE Series 90 CCM .........................................................................246
GE-Fanuc 90-SNP ..........................................................................247
Hitachi EC......................................................................................249
Hitachi H/EH1 ...............................................................................250
Hust CNC Controller .....................................................................252
Idec Micro-3 ...................................................................................253
Jetter Nano_B .................................................................................255
Klockner Moeller PS .......................................................................257
Koyo SA/TI 325/330 ......................................................................258
Koyo Direct DL/Koyo SU Series/TI435..........................................260
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Contents
LG Glofa GM6............................................................................... 262
LG K10/60H/200H ....................................................................... 263
LG K200S ...................................................................................... 265
LG K300S ...................................................................................... 266
LG Master-K10S/K30S/60S/100S .................................................. 267
Matsushita FP ................................................................................. 268
Mitsubishi FX ................................................................................. 272
Mitsubishi A ................................................................................... 274
Mitsubishi QnA .............................................................................. 277
Modbus Slave ................................................................................. 279
Modicon PC984 or Modbus (ASCII) or TSX Quantum ................ 280
Omron C........................................................................................ 282
Omron CS1 .................................................................................... 284
Omron CV ..................................................................................... 285
Side Mida 20/20D .......................................................................... 288
Siemens Simatic S5 ......................................................................... 290
Siemens Simatic S5 3964R ............................................................. 292
Siemens Simatic S7-200 PPI ........................................................... 293
Siemens Simatic S7-300 CP340...................................................... 295
Siemens Simatic S7-300 via MPI port............................................. 296
Siemens Simatic S7-300 MPI-Cable ............................................... 298
Siemens Simatic S7-300 HMI-Cable .............................................. 300
Taian TP01 .................................................................................... 302
Taian TP02 .................................................................................... 303
Telemecanique TSX Micro ............................................................. 306
Toshiba M20/M40 ......................................................................... 308
Toshiba T1/T2 ............................................................................... 309
Unidriver UD70 ............................................................................. 311
Yokogawa FA-M3 ........................................................................... 314
10 Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models .......... 317
Beijer Electronics, MA00822 V
Contents
VI Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Installation
1 Installation
The basic H-Designer system requirements are as follows:
– PC - CPU 80586 or higher;
– Memory - 64 MB RAM or more;
– Hardware - 60 MB or more available hard drive space;
– Display - VGA or SVGA. Microsoft Windows with 256 colors or higher, and a resolution of 800×600 or higher.
Since all the programs in the H-Designer suite have been compressed, one needs to uncompress and install the software before using it.
The H-Designer software can be run under the following Windows operating systems:
– Windows 95
– Windows 98
– Windows ME
– Windows 2000
– Windows XP
The software is available from the following website or your local distributor.
www.beijerelectronics.com
Note also that not all features provided by H-Designer are available for every operator terminal model.
For complete details of these H-Designer features and the applicable models, please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
9
Installation
1.1 Installation Procedure
1. Start your computer in the Windows environment.
2. Click Start and select Run. When the Run dialog box appears on the screen, select Browse to locate the installation program Setup.exe.
Running the H-Designer installation program “Setup.exe” in Windows
3. Click OK to start the installation.
H-Designer is preparing to install
4. Follow the instructions and specify the hard drive and directory where H-
Designer is to be installed.
10
The destination hard drive and directory
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Installation
5. Click Next to select the type of setup. Typical is recommended for most users.
Compact installs the program with basic options. Custom allows users to individually select the options to install and this is recommended for advanced users.
Selecting the type of setup
6. Click Next to begin the installation. If the Typical option is selected, the following dialog box will appear on the screen.
H-Designer installation
7. After installation, the system will create the H-Designer icon automatically.
8. Once the installation is complete, the H-Designer software can be found in the specified directory. To launch the H-Designer program, simply click the
H-Designer icon.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
11
Installation
12
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2 Instructions
Microsoft Windows
TM
is undeniably the predominant PC operating environment these days. H-Designer is designed to make full use of the Windows environment, using a “What You See is What You Get” Approach. Users can immediately see the objects they create on a PC screen with their specified attributes, such as font size, color, object location, picture, scale, frame, and so on. What the user sees on the PC screen will be the same as what is displayed on a operator terminal.
Furthermore, H-Designer utilizes the principles of object-oriented design to implement drag-and-drop editing. Users can use a mouse to conveniently drag objects to another location or change their shape and size as they wish.
2.1
H-Designer Programming Environment
The figure below illustrates the main menu bars and tool boxes in the H-Designer program environment.
Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbars Toolboxes
Window Workspace
Status Bar
H-Designer program environment overview
Title Bar
The Title Bar shows the name of the window and the directory where the current application is found.
For example: C:\Program Files\H-Designer\Project Files\Project1.V6F.
If an application file has not been saved, “Untitled” will be displayed in the Title Bar.
Menu Bar
There are 13 menus in the Menu Bar; they are File, Edit, View, Screen, Draw,
Object, Library, Application, Tool, Options, LadderPlus, Window and Help.
Tool Bar
Users can easily create an H-Designer project by clicking the icons on the Tool Bar.
This feature also helps new users to familiarize themselves with the software quickly and easily.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
13
Instructions
Window Workspace
This is the area where the user designs a screen. The objects or data created in this area will actually be displayed on the operator terminal screen.
In the following sections, we will talk about the function, application, and usage of each of the commands and menus in much more detail.
2.2 File Menu
The main purpose of the File menu is to manage the files created by H-Designer.
2.2.1
New
This command allows users to create a new application and specify its properties, including Application Name, Panel/Terminal, Controller/PLC, Printer, Multilin-
gual Support, Control Block, Status Block, and so on.
To create a new application, select File/New. The New Application’s Properties dialog box appears on the screen.
14
The New Application’s Properties dialog box
The following are the basic properties a user needs to set up for a new application:
– In the Application Name box, enter the application name.
– In the Panel/Terminal list, select a operator terminal model.
– In the Controller/PLC list, select the type of controller which the operator terminal will communicate with.
and
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.2.2
Open and Close
Open opens an existing application.
Close closes the application.
2.2.3
Save and Save as
Selecting Save saves an existing application, replacing the previous copy with the new copy.
Selecting Save As saves a new or existing application with a new name.
2.2.4
An application file can be printed for the planning, management or storage.
Note:
The Print option is not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Select File/Print and the Print Options dialog box appears on the screen.
The Print Options dialog box
There are three options available: Workstation Setup, Screen Overview, and Screen
Image.
Workstation Setup prints the operator terminal data, such as the controller type, configuration setup, and the logging buffer details.
An example of the Workstation Setup print option
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
15
Instructions
Screen Overview prints a screen image with the controller location of each object.
An example of the Screen Overview print option
Screen Image prints a screen image without the controller locations.
16
An example of the Screen Image print option
Other options:
Copies: Specifies the number of copies to print.
Range: Only available for the Screen Overview and Screen Image options.
2.2.5
Upload Application and Download
Application From
Upload Application is used to upload an application from a operator terminal to a
PC and save the file as *.AF6.
Download Application From is used to download a program from a PC to a operator terminal. The file format is *.AF6.
2.2.6
Upload Recipes and Download Recipes
Upload Recipes is used to upload recipes from the operator terminal to a PC. The file will be saved as *.RCP.
Download Recipes is used to download recipes from a PC to a operator terminal.
The file format used is *.RCP.
Note:
These functions are not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.2.7
Reconstruct Source
This function allows users to directly reconstruct the source file of an application by uploading the application file from an operator terminal to a PC.
Reconstruct Source is used to reconstruct an uploaded application file from *.AA6 to *.V6F.
The application will be displayed on a PC and the source file (*.V6F) can be saved for the future editing and application.
In H-Designer, an application downloaded to an operator terminal is “rebuildable”;
Reconstruct Source enables a user to directly reconstruct a source file of an uploaded application on an operator terminal from *.AA6 to *.V6F.
Note:
This function is not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Steps to reconstruct a source file from *.AA6 to *V6F:
(Assuming that an application has been uploaded on the operator terminal.)
1. On the operator terminal, select Upload Application. In H-Designer, select File/
Upload Application. The operator terminal will upload the application to the
PC and the file will be saved as *.AF6.
2. Next, select File/Reconstruct Source and open the application file (*.C64 or
*.AA6). The application should appear on the PC and the user can save the source file as *.V6F for future use.
2.2.8
Exit
Exit is used to close and exit H-Designer.
If any changes have been made, the following dialog box will appear on the screen, asking the user to save the changes or exit.
The Exit dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
17
Instructions
2.3 Edit Menu
The primary purposes of the Edit menu include the common editing functions for
H-Designer screen and objects. If a user does not open an image, all of the lightcolored items in the Edit menu are unavailable.
The user can click the icons on the tool bar to speed edit or quickly gain use of the elements on the list by right-clicking with the mouse.
The following sections will explain the functions that are more specific to the
H-Designer software.
The Edit menu and the Edit toolbar
2.3.1
Duplicate
Allows a user to make multiple copies of an object and simultaneously increase the corresponding addresses incrementally.
18
The Duplicate dialog box
Number of Copies
Columns: Specifies number of columns to duplicate.
Rows: Specifies the number of rows to duplicate.
Spacing
Horizontal: Specifies how many pixels to space duplicate ob-jects horizontally.
Vertical: Specifies how many pixels to space duplicate ob-jects vertically.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Address Increment
X-Direction: The address of the same dynamic objects in-creases from left to right.
Y-Direction: The address of the same dynamic objects increases from top to bottom.
Duplicate
2.3.2
Find/Replace Address
The main function is to find or edit addresses in a created project and to replace the found addresses.
The Find/Replace Address dialog box
Enter the address in the blank space or select from the drop-down list directly (e.g.
W100); then click the Find button to search. The Result tab displays a detailed list according to the designated range and address.
The Result tab
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
19
Instructions
Use the Replace button to replace the address with a new one. The function of the
Replace button is to replace the objects’ addresses one by one; use Replace All to replace all of the objects’ address at one time.
The Replace tab
Example 1: Find Screen Address
Select Type/Screen to find the screen address.
20
Find Screen address
Range:
– Current screen: Only finds in the current open screen.
– All screens: Finds all the screens in the application program.
Option:
– Match whole word only: The findings match the entry address entirely. If this option is not selected, the initial findings match the entry address including partial and entire matches.
– Open attribute dialog: To display an object’s attributes, double-click it in the list on the Result tab. If this option is not selected, the object attributes dialog box is unavailable.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Example 2: Find Macro Address
Select Type/Macro to find the macro address.
Instructions
Find Macro address
Range
– Current macro: Finds the current macro.
– Current screen macros: Finds the current image/screen macros.
– Sub-macros: Finds all sub-macros.
– All screens’ macros: Finds all image/screen macros.
– Application macros: Finds three types of macros in the Application menu.
– All macros: Finds all macros.
Option
– Match whole word only: The findings match the entry address entirely. If this option is not selected, the initial findings match the entry address including partial and entire matches.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
21
Instructions
2.3.3
Decompose Shape
This function is primarily used to decompose the graphics created using Shape in the
Draw command. Each decomposed graphic can be modified and edited.
Selecting Graph in Draw/Shape to edit
Selecting Edit/Decompose to modify each decomposed object
22
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.3.4
Align and Make Same Size
These two functions are primarily used to align created objects or to make them the same size, for example indicators, moving signs, message displays and lines. The following are the steps used for these two commands:
1. Select Shift and click on all objects which are to be aligned or made the same size.
2. Click on the master object; the four corners of this master object should then be shaded.
3. Select the command Align or Make Same Size to make the other objects aligned with or made same size as the master object.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
23
Instructions
2.3.5
Nudge and Layer
Nudge: Choose objects to slightly shift location and adjust towards the specified direction.
Layer: If there are more than two objects, users can shift the objects’ layer positions up and down.
The Layer/Bring to Next command sends the rectangle to the top.
The Layer/Send to Previous sends the rectangle to the bottom.
2.3.6
Group and Ungroup
If there are more than two graphics or objects on the screen to be edited; frame (by using Shift + left-click) all objects to be grouped and then select Group. All of the framed objects will be moved to the appointed position as a single unit.
24
Select Edit/Group to group the selected objects together.
Ungroup is used to ungroup the selected group of objects.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.3.7
Object Attributes
You can edit the content of the objects or modify the data location and formats associated with the controller.
Note that different objects (such as the push button, indicator, moving sign and message display) have their own object attributes.
Click on the object and then select Edit/Object Attributes and the dialog box will then be displayed on the screen. You can also double-click directly on the objects. For properties not explained in this section, please refer to section
The ON/Off Button object attributes dialog box
The Moving Sign object attributes dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
25
Instructions
2.3.8
State/Text Management
The main uses of State/Text Management include editing the text, colors, and typefaces used the object created. This function also provides users with easier operation, enabling such functions as copy, modify, line feed, and so on.
The State & Text Management dialog box
Focal Mark Style
There are five focal mark styles to choose from: None, Still Lines, Circulating Lines,
Circulating Dots and Swaying Dots.
This function is not limited by any application images or files. It modifies the
H-Designer editing environment.
26
The Focal Mark Style list
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Objects with different focal marks
Common Attributes
This function makes it easier to edit objects with common attributes simultaneously.
The user can modify attributes of all objects which are on the screen at one time.
First, select the objects to be edited at one time. The Common Attributes dialog box will be displayed on the screen when you double-click one of the objects.
Opening the Common Attributes dialog box
The user can edit the common attributes of selected objects, such as location/dimension, apperance and text.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
27
Instructions
Language
Specifies language to be used for the selected objects.
Apply to State
Specifies the state of the selected objects. The user can edit different states in this list.
Location/Dimension
Specifies the width and height of the objects. Click the Apply button to modify.
Outlook
Specifies the apperance of selected objects.
Shape ID: Specifies the shape of different objects. When clicking the Select button, a dialog box with a selection of shapes will appear on the screen.
Selection of shape of the object
When the selection has been made, a dialog box with a selection of functions for the selected shape will appear on the screen as.
28
Selection of function of the object
The user can then select the next object to create.
Outline Color: Specifies the outline color of all selected objects.
Background Color: Specifies the background color of the selected objects.
Pattern: Specifies the pattern of all selected objects which can be set.
Pattern Color: Specifies the pattern color of all selected objects which can be set.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Text
Font: Specifies the text font for different objects. The user can specify the text font for different types of objects. When using the Selection button, the Font Selection dialog box will be displayed.
Specifies the text font for objects
Color: Specifies the text color for all selected objects.
Alignment: Specifies the text alignment type for all selected objects.
Underlined: Specifies whether the text of all selected objects is to be underlined.
Contents: Specifies the text contents for all selected objects.
Remember to click the Apply button to apply changes.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
29
Instructions
2.4 View Menu
The main functions of the View menu include the managing functions of whole screen, whole screen with I/O labels, five language selections, zoom in/out, and eight kinds of toolbars.
2.4.1
Whole Screen and Whole Screen With
I/O Labels
Whole Screen: Full-screen view showing all edited objects. The user can return to the previous view by clicking on the screen.
Whole Screen With I/O Labels: To view the whole screen with dynamic objects with write/read addresses displayed on the top left side . The user can return to the previous view by clicking on the screen.
Displaying Whole Screen With I/O Labels
2.4.2
Language 1-5
There are five languages available to the user. Please follow the steps below to set up multiple languages:
1. Select Application/Workstation Setup. The Application Properties dialog box will appear on the screen.
30
The Application Properties dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2. On the General tab, check the Multi-lingual Support box to begin setup.
Number of Languages: Specify the number of languages required for the project. A maximum of 5 languages can be selected.
Select Language: Specifies the languages to use.
Startup Language: Specifies the language to display at startup. The user can select the language directly from the View menu if the screen language is to be switched later.
2.4.3
Zoom In, Normal and Zoom Out
Zoom In: To enlarge the image size by a set percentage of 150%, 175%, 200%, or
250%.
Normal: To adjust the image size to the actual size of the screen.
Zoom Out: To decrease the image size by a set percentage of 75%, 50%, or 25%.
2.4.4
Toolbars
There are eight different toolbars in the View menu. The user can decide to display the toolbars for quick-operation or not. The toolbars are shown as below:
The Standard toolbar
The Edit toolbar, the Draw toolbar and the Basic Objects toolbar
The Text toolbar
The Bitmap toolbar, the Monitor toolbar and the Ladder toolbar
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
31
Instructions
2.5 Screen Menu
The main purposes of the Screen menu are to name, number, edit, and manage screens. The following sections will explain these commands in detail.
2.5.1
New Screen
Select New Screen to create a new screen.
In the Name field, enter the name for the new screen. In the Number field, enter the screen number.
The Create New Screen dialog box
2.5.2
Screen Manager
The function of the Screen Manager command is to display all of the application files in detail view or thumbnail view in order to make it easy for a user to search, modify, edit, and so on.
Select Screen/Screen Manager or click . The entire Screen Manager will be displayed in the middle of the window or minimized on the left side.
32
The Screen Manager
In the Screen Manager window, click the number or name to display the selected screen. If you want to open the image, just double-click on the image.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Screen Manager Icons
Screen Manager icons provide functions to manage screens and screen properties, as well as functions to increase ease of use of the Screen Manager, as explained below:
Icon
Dock
Name
Undock
Close
Function
The size of the Screen Manager window will be decreased, and the Screen Manager will be docked at the left side of the screen.
The Screen Manager window is restored to full screen size.
Closes the Screen Manager.
Detail View/
Thumbnail View
New Screen
Displays screen data in different ways, either as detailed list data, or as thumbnails.
Adds a screen with No. and Name. A new screen appears in the Screen Manager list.
Also described in image below.
Screen Properties Opens the Screen Properties dialog box. Please refer to section
Open Screen Opens and displays the selected screen while the
Screen Manager window will be minimized at the bottom. A screen can also be opened by double-clicking on it.
Cut Screen/
Copy Screen/
Paste Screen/
Delete Screen
Used to edit the selected screens. A pop-up menu to select editing operations can also be displayed by by right-clicking on the screen. Use the Ctrl-key while left-clicking to select several screens for editing at once. Also described in image below.
View Recycle Bin Lists all of the deleted screens marked with red.
Right-click on the screen list and then select Restore from the list. Also described in image below.
Click the again to return to the previous Screen
Manager window.
Select Language Specifies the language displayed in the screen.
Also described in image below.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
33
Instructions
Adding a new screen from the Screen Manager.
34
Selecting two screens for editing at once. Right-clicking opens the edit pop-up menu.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Restoring a deleted screen.
Switching between Language 1 and Language 2
Screen Table
In the Screen Manager, click the Detail View button. The detailed data will be listed in the table in five columns: No., Name, Size, Compilation and Optimization.
When you click the header, the data will be listed in increased or decreased order following numerical order, dimensional order, and so on.
List sorted in numerical order after clicking No. in the table header.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
35
Instructions
The Screen Manager can also help you manage and edit the screens quickly and easily. If the data in these columns is to be modified, you can click the Screen Properties button on the toolbar and modify the screen properties in the displayed dialog box.
Alternatively, right-click for the Screen Properties selection.
The Compilation column is used to choose to check compilation or not. This can also be configured in the Screen Properties dialog box, on the General tab.
The Optimization column is used to choose to perform block optimization during compilation. This can also be configured in the Screen Properties dialog box, on the
Read Blocks tab.
Please refer to section
2.5.3
Close Screen
Closes the current screen.
2.5.4
Cut/Copy/Delete Current Screen and
Paste Screen
Cuts, copies or deletes the current screen. A cut or copied screen can be pasted onto other screens.
2.5.5
OPEN Macro, CLOSE Macro and CYCLIC
Macro
These three macros enable the operator terminal to execute data initialization, display control, and internal register or contact initialization. Once these commands are selected, the operator terminal will display the edit screen.
36
The OPEN Macro edit screen
OPEN Macro is executed when the screen open command is issued. A screen is not displayed until the OPEN Macro is completely executed. There is one OPEN Macro per screen.
CLOSE Macro is executed when the screen close command is issued. A screen is not closed until the CLOSE Macro is completely executed. There is one CLOSE Macro per screen.
The CYCLIC Macro is executed cyclically when the screen is displayed. The operator terminal stops executing the macro when it encounters an End command or reaches the end of the macro.
Please refer to chapter
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.5.6
Screen Properties
The function of the Screen Properties command is to display the properties of the current screen including General, Screen Background Style and Read Block tabs.
General Tab
The General tab of the Screen Properties dialog box
Screen Number: Specifies the number of the current screen.
Included in the compilation: Use this option to compile the selected screen or not.
This feature provides convenient screen editing but is unnecessary for draft screens.
Screen Name: Enters the name for a current screen.
Screen Update and Key Function: Specifies the types of screen updates.
Need a base screen: Check this option for a base screen. A base screen can be the background for various screens.
This screen is a sub-screen: Check this option to display the selected screen as a subscreen. You can designate the width, height, location and buttons of a sub-screen in this block. (Maximum width = 180; height = 160). For further information, please refer to section
.
Printed Area: Specifies the area to print. Note that this feature is available only on models with PRINTER PORT.
Slide-out Menu: Specifies the slide-out menu of the screen.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
37
Instructions
Screen Background Style Tab
The Screen Background Style tab of the Screen Properties dialog box
Filled With:
When selecting Pattern, the options Pattern, Pattern Color and Background Color will be available for selection.
38
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
When selecting Bitmap, a bitmap can be selected from the drop-down list. There are two filling methods available:
– Stretch: Displays the bitmap entirely on the entire screen. When this option is selected, the bitmap can be enlarged to match the designed screen.
– Tile: Displays the duplicate bitmaps lined up on the designed screen. Each bitmap keeps its original size.
Selecting the Tile option
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
39
Instructions
Read Blocks Tab
40
The Read Blocks tab of the Screen Properties dialog box
The function of the Read Block tab is to specify register block addresses, on/off block addresses, size (in words), and refresh rate.
Register Block Address: Specifies the register block address according to the controller. A screen can have a maximum of five specified register addresses.
On/Off Block Address: Specifies the on/off block address. A screen can have a maximum of five specified register addresses.
Size: Specifies the size of block.
Refresh Rate:
– Normal: Reads data at normal speed for the controller.
– Fast: Reads data at twice the speed of Normal.
– On Unchanged by Operator: Enables users to change the value on the operator terminal but not change the value in the controller
Perform block optimization: Check this option to merge adjacent data into blocks.
Note that it is recommended that the data addresses of the controller are continuous to ensure good communication with the controller.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Auxiliary Keys Tab
Instructions
The Auxiliary Keys tab of the Screen Properties dialog box
The main function of the Auxiliary Keys is to create the attributes of external buttons. The buttons defined on the Auxiliary Keys tab are only available for the current screen. If the F1 key is defined in screen 5 as Goto Screen 1, this function is only available on screen 5.
Click the Function key to display the function assignment dialog box.
The Function Assignment dialog box
Note:
This function is not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
41
Instructions
Sub-screen
A sub-screen is a screen that is smaller than the normal screen. The operator terminal displays a sub-screen in the center of the screen without destroying the existing display and adds a raised frame to it automati-cally.
The following are the steps required to create a sub-screen:
1. Create a new screen; enter the screen name and number.
2. Open the Screen Properties dialog box and check the This screen is a sub-
screen box.
3. Enter the width and height of the sub-screen.
4. Specify the position of the sub-screen display (shown on the display center or designated specific position).
42
Modifying attributes of a sub-screen
5. After clicking Enter, the screen will be minimized to the specified size.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Base Screen
A base screen is a screen which may be used as a template for many different screens.
Once you have edited a base screen, all of the same base screens in the application will be changed at the same time.
The following are the steps required to create a base screen:
1. Create a base screen first, named for example Screen 5.
2. Create a new screen (Screen 6). Then check the Need a base screen box and specify the base screen (Screen 5) in the Screen Properties dialog box.
Specifying a base screen
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
43
44
Instructions
2.6 Draw Menu
To strengthen the effectiveness of the display of the created objects, it is often helpful to draw a rectangle, a line, or a scale to label the object data. This will help users to read and take note of the data.
The geometric shapes are static, and are not influenced by dynamic controller data.
2.6.1
Geometric Shapes
The following geometric shapes are included:
Toolbar button Function
Draws a dot
Described in section
Draws a line
Draws a horizontal line
Line, Horizontal Line and Vertical Line
Draws a vertical line
Connects lines with mouse movement
Connected lines and curves with mouse movement
Draws a rectangle
Draws a solid rectangle
Draws a parallelogram
Draws a solid parallelogram
Parallelogram and Solid Parallelogram
Draws a circle
Draws a solid circle
Draws an ellipse
Draws a solid ellipse
Draws an arc
Draws a pie segment
Draws a solid pie segment
Circle, Solid Circle, Ellipse and Solid
Draws a polygon
Draws a solid polygon
Static text display and design
Displays a bitmap
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Toolbar button Function
Draws a frame/edge
Draws a scale
Draws a table
Displays a shape
Described in section
Double-click on the object, or right-click and select Object Attributes. The dialog box corresponding to the object will appear.
The Rectangle dialog box
Dot
Style, Color and Profile can be specified in the Dot dialog box.
Drawing a Dot
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
45
Instructions
Line, Horizontal Line and Vertical Line
Type, Color, Arrows and Profile can be specified in the Line, Horizontal Line and
Vertical Line dialog boxes.
Drawing a Line with arrows
Connected Lines and Free Form
Connected Lines are used to connect lines with the movement of the mouse cursor.
Click mouse button once, and then move the cursor somewhere else on the screen, to draw a straight line between the two points. This will continue until you rightclick with the mouse.
Free Form is used to create lines and curves by holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse cursor. This will continue until you right-click with the mouse.
Style, Color, Arrows and Profile can be specified in the Connected Lines and Free
Form dialog boxes.
46
Drawing Connected Lines with arrows
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Rectangle and Solid Rectangle
Rectangle and Solid Rectangle are used to draw rectangular shapes.
Type, Frame and Profile can be specified in the Rectangle and Solid Rectangle dialog boxes. Fill is used for the Solid Rectangle.
Rectangle with clipped corners
Parallelogram and Solid Parallelogram
Parallelogram and Solid Parallelogram are used to draw a parallelograms by holding down the left mouse button to draw a side. This side will continue until you left-click with the mouse. Then you drag this side to configure a rectangle until you right-click with the mouse.
Border and Profile can be specified in the Parallelogram and Solid Parallelogram dialog boxes. Fill is used for the Solid Parallelogram.
Drawing a Parallelogram
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
47
Instructions
Circle, Solid Circle, Ellipse and Solid Ellipse
Circle, Solid Circle, Ellipse and Solid Ellipse are used to draw circles and ellipses.
Border and Profile can be specified in the Circle and Ellipse dialog boxes. Fill is used for the Solid Circle and Solid Ellipse.
The Circle dialog box
Arc, Pie and Solid Pie
Arc is used to draw a circle by holding down the left mouse button. Continue until you have configured the desired size, then right-click. Left-click for a radius display.
You can drag the radius to configure a desired arc until left-clicking again.
48
Drawing an Arc
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Drawing a pie segment or a solid pie segment is similar to drawing an arc. The difference between a pie and an arc is that two lines are connected between the two sides of an arc and the center.
Arc, Pie and Solid Pie
The Arc, Pie and Solid Pie dialog boxes are the same:
The Pie/Arc Attributes dialog box
Check Arc to draw an arc; check Fill to draw a solid arc and specify the Pattern there; check Arc and adjust the width and height under Profile to configure an arc from an ellipse.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
49
Instructions
Polygon and Solid Polygon
Polygon is used to draw sides of a polygon by moving the mouse cursor and to connect the lines between the starting point and the terminal point with the shortest distance. Draw a polygon by dragging the mouse cursor, then left-clicking on the turning point and right-clicking to form a polygon.
Border and Profile can be specified in the Polygon and Solid Polygon dialog boxes.
Fill is used for the Solid Polygon.
The Polygon Attributes dialog box
Static Text
The Static Text object allows you to select text, font, color, reading order, alignment, and frame/edge. Double-click on the object to display the Static Text dialog box on the screen.
Text tab
Enter text in the Text area. 16 different types of fonts can be selected.
50
The Text tab of the Static Text dialog box
For properties not explained in this section, please refer to the section
.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Frame/Edge tab
Click the Select button to specify the style of frame/edge.
Instructions
The Frame/Edge tab of the Static Text dialog box
Bitmap
The purpose of Bitmap is to provide graphics for selection. Double-click on the object; you can then select the bitmap from the drop-down list in the Static Graphic dialog box.
The Static Graphic dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
51
52
Instructions
Frame/Edge
Frame/Edge enables you to choose style, pattern style, background and color.
The Frame/Edge dialog box
Clicking Select displays flow chart styles for selection.
Selection of Frame Style
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Scale
Scale provides scales directed left, right, up and down, as well as color, number of ticks, and display marks for scales.
The Scale dialog box
Table
Table is used to create tables.
The Table dialog box
Use First Row as Row Header: Specifies the pattern style and color of row header.
Use First Column as Column Header: Specifies the pattern style and color of column header.
Border: Specifies the style and color of border.
Profile: Specifies the location and size of a table.
Cells General: Specifies the number of rows/columns, and style.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
53
Instructions
Transparent: Lets other object(s) be displayed under the table.
Example: Static text displayed under the table.
Interlacing: Interlaces rows or columns. Not available with transparent table.
Interlacing
Apply to Header: Interlace applied to header. Not available with transparent table.
54
Interlacing applied to header
Shape
Shape provides graphics for selection. Double-click on the object, then click Select to access the shape library in the Shape dialog box.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Flow Chart
Flow chart is one of the applications in Draw used for lines, geometric graphs and frame/edge editing. You can illustrate an applied flow chart clearly to facilitate operations.
Example:
Convert the boiler temperature in Procedure A into centigrade (° C). If the temperature is less than 100° C, Procedure B will be entered; if the temperature is 100° C or more, Procedure C will be entered. The following flow chart is made up of polygons, rectangles, lines with arrows and static text:
Flow chart example
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
55
Instructions
2.7 Object Menu
A screen object is an item placed on the screen to perform a particular function. Each object has its unique user configurable properties and the object can be set to perform in exactly the method desired.
Objects are divided into four categories:
1. Related to screen buttons and dynamic data, e.g. Push Button, Numeric Entry and List
2. Unrelated to screen buttons but related to dynamic data, e.g. Numeric Display and Bar Graph
3. Related to dynamic controller data and operator terminal memory buffer zone;
Historical Display and Alarm Display
4. Related to application; data contents are connected with the entire system. If one of the contents is modified, such as text display or controller data format, the other objects with the same application will be changed simultaneously as Sub-
macro.
Related to screen button and dynamic data
Irrelative to screen button but related to dynamic data
Related to dynamic controller data and operator terminal memory buffer zone
Related to application
The Object menu
2.7.1
Creating Objects
You can select the object type from the Object menu for editing. Some objects, such as the Push Button, have sub-command lists.
56
The Push Button sub-commands
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Some of the objects are provided in the Basic Objects toolbar for editing.
Instructions
The Basic Objects toolbar
Select a desired object from the list, for example Push Button/Set Button, and you will get a cursor (+) that allows you to drag the object to the desired size by clicking the left mouse button and then clicking again when finished.
Once created, the object can be resized by dragging one of the object’s handlebars. If the object’s handlebars are not visible, clicking anywhere on the object will display the handlebars). To move the object, click at the center of the object and then drag it.
2.7.2
Specifying Object Properties
There are three ways to specify the properties of an object:
1. You can select Object Attributes from the Edit menu
2. You can double-click on the object
3. You can right-click on the object and then select Object Attributes from the pop-up menu.
Each of the above methods will bring up the dialog box for the properties specified.
In the H-Designer software, each object has a corresponding dialog box. For example, there is the On/Off Button dialog box in the Set Button object; there is the Nu-
meric Entry dialog box in the Numeric Entry object.
The following five tabs are available for most objects; certain specific properties will be explained later.
Attributes Tab
Major properties are specified on the Attributes tab. Each object has attributes that define its use.
The Attributes tab of the On/Off Button dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
57
Instructions
Shape
Select: Specifies shape from library.
Color: Specifies the color of the selected shape.
Variable
Write: Writes to the specified controller register.
Read: Reads the value from the specified controller register. If the location is not specified, the operator terminal reads from the Write location.
Enabled By: Specifies the controller register to the ON button. This is not available in OFF state labeled.
Specified State = OFF / Specified State =ON
This feature is only available on objects with input text/numeric or specific states.
Shape Tab
The shape style of a selected object is defined on the Shape tab.
58
The Shape tab of the On/Off Button dialog box
Shape
Select: Selects shape from library.
Color: Specifies the color of the shape.
Profile
Specifies the location, width, and height of the object.
State
Pattern Style: Specifies the pattern style for the object.
Pattern Color: Specifies the color of the pattern for the object.
Background Color: Specifies the background color of the object.
Blink: Specifies whether the object blinks.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
State Tab
The states of the object are defined on the State tab.
Instructions
The State tab of the Multistate Button dialog box
New: Adds a new state to the object.
Cut: Cuts the specified state to the clipboard.
Copy: Copies the specified state of the object and keep the original state.
Paste: Pastes the state from the clipboard.
Replace: Replaces the current specified state from the clipboard.
Delete: Deletes the current specified state.
Text Tab
Font and apperarance of the text in the object is specified on the Text tab.
The Text tab of the Multistate Button dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
59
Instructions
Editing Option
Wrap Lines: If the length of the text is longer than the width of the button, it will be executed in wrapped lines.
Text Movable: If the length of the text is longer than the width of the button, it will not be executed in wrapped lines. Click the text on the selected object, to make the text surrounded with the handlebars for dragging.
Appearance
Font: Specifies the size of the font.
Underlined: Specifies whether the text is to be underlined.
Color: Specifies the text color.
Background Color: Specifies the background text color.
Blink: Specifies whether the text blinks.
Aligns the text to the left/center/to the right.
Graphic Tab
Bitmap style, color etc for each state is defined on the Graphic tab.
60
The Graphic tab of the Multistate Button dialog box
Bitmap: Specifies the bitmap to display.
Transparent: Specifies whether the bitmap is transparent.
Transparent Color: Specifies the color of the bitmap when transparent.
Black Part Color: Replaces the black part color (only available for monochrome diplays).
White Part Color: Replaces the white part color (only available for monochrome displays).
Arrangement: Arranges the moveable bitmap to a previous location.
Keep Original Size: Keeps the bitmap’s original size.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.3
Buttons
There are 13 buttons in the sub-command list for the Push Button menu:
Icon Function
Set Button: Click to set the contact as ON, release or re-click still to set ON.
Reset Button: Click to set the contact as OFF, release or re-click still to set OFF.
Maintained Button: Click to set the contact as ON, released still on; re-click to set OFF.
Momentary Button: Click to set the contact as ON; release be OFF.
Multistate Button: Click to change a register to the next (previous) state of a referenced register.
S0 S1 S2 ward cycle) or S0
(a reverse cycle).
S3
S4
S4
S3
S0 (a straightfor-
S2 S1 S0
Set Value Button: Click to a numeric keypad display.
Click ENTER button to write a numeric entry to corresponding controller register.
Set Constant Button: Click to write a constant to a register.
Increment/Decrement Button: Click to write the value obtained by adding/subtracting a constant to/from the corresponding register value corresponding controller register.
Goto Screen Button: Click to change the current screen to the specified screen.
Previous Screen Button: Click to change the current screen to the previous screen.
Action Button: Performs a built-in action.
Described in section
,
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
61
Instructions
Set Button
When pressed, the operator terminal sets the controller’s corresponding bit location to ON. A Set Button will be ON whether pressed or released.
Attributes Tab
Function: Select Set.
Selecting the Set function for the Set Button
Security:
– Minimum Hold Time (Sec.): Specify how long to activate the button (0-10 seconds).
– Operator Confirmation: If any changes have been made, this dialog box will appear on the screen to ask the user to confirm the desired operation. A waiting timed of 5-60 seconds can be selected.
Macro: Check the Use ON Macro for a Set Button. Click the Edit button to display the ON Macro dialog box.
62
The ON Macro edit window
For properties not explained in this section, please see chapter
– Use ON Macro: When the Set Button is selected, the operator terminal will run the program createdas ON macro. This feature is for data control, screen display, controller register, bits initialized and so on.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Example of designing a Set Button
On the Attributes tab of the On/Off Button:
1. Shape: Select Raised.
2. Write: Specify the controller register B0 to write in.
Read: Specify B0. (The controller model is NULL.)
On the Text tab of the On/Off Button:
3. Enter text OFF for state 0; the font 16 x 16, the color White and the background color Black.
4. Enter text ON for state 1 ; the font 24 x 24, the color Black and the background color White.
The button is white displaying ON in state 1, and black displaying OFF in state 0.
Reset Button
This button is contrary to the Set Button. A Reset Button sets a bit-location to OFF whenever pressed or released.
Attributes Tab
Function: Select Reset.
All other properties are the same as for the Set Button; please see section
Maintained Button
The function of the Maintained Button is to change the button states by pressing.
Click to be ON and when released will still be ON until re-clicked to be OFF.
Attributes Tab
Function: Select Maintained.
Macro: There are Use ON Macro and Use OFF Macro options for the Maintained
Button. For properties not explained in this section, please see chapter
All other properties are the same as for the Set Button; please see section
Momentary Button
The function of the Momentary Button is to change the state by clicking and releasing. When the button is pressed, the bit-location is ON; when it is released, it is OFF.
Attributes Tab
Function: Select Momentary.
Macro: There are Use ON Macro and Use OFF Macro options for the Momentary
Button. For properties not explained in this section, please see chapter
To create two states as an ON button simultaneously, please see section
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
63
64
Instructions
Multistate Button
When the button is pressed, the operator terminal will write the command to a corresponding controller bit-location or register. The option Change to Next State is used to change states in a straightforward cycle (S0 S1 S2 S3 S4
S0); the option Change to Previous State is used to change states in a reverse cycle (S0 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0). Click to change a register to the next (previous) state of a referenced register.
Attributes Tab
Variable:
Write: Writes the specified command to a corresponding controller bit-location and register.
– Bit: Only two states; enables you to enter multistated text but only two states can be displayed on the operator terminal.
– Value: 256 (0-255) states in all, 0 represents state 0; 1 represents state 1…etc.
– LSB: 16 states in all represented by bit. The operator terminal takes the bit number of the lowest bit that is on as the state number.
Format: Only available when Value has been selected. There are BCD, Signed Bina-
ry and Unsigned Binary options.
– Read: Specifies a register/bit location to read from; if the location is not specified, then the operator terminal reads from the Write location.
Function:
– Change to Next State: Changes the Write location to its next state in a forward cycle S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S0.
– Change to Previous State: Changes the Write location to its previous state in a re-
Note that the number of states can be edited on the State tab.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing a Multistate Button
On the Attributes tab of the Multistate Button:
1. Write: Specify controller register W50 to write in.
Read: Specify W50. (The controller model is NULL.)
2. Format: Value.
3. Function: Change to Previous State.
4. Shape: Select Outlined _1 and the color Black.
On the State tab of the Multistate Button:
5. Add 8 States.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
On the Text tab of the Multistate Button:
6. Enter the corresponding texts.
Instructions
Texts for the 8 different states of the Multistate Button in the example
The above steps will create a Multistate Button that displays First State in state 0;
Second State in state 1 etc.
Set Value Button
The function of the Set Value Button is to enable numeric entry. When pressed, the operator terminal displays a numeric keypad on the screen. When pressing ENT, the operator terminal will store the input value to the corresponding controller register.
Note that the corresponding controller value is not available in the Set Value Button.
Attributes Tab
Variable:
– Word: The entered value is 16-bit data; the maximum 65,535.
– Double Word: The entered value is 32-bit data; the maximum is 4,294,967,295.
– Format: BCD, Signed Binary, Unsigned Binary and Hexadecimal can be selected.
– Notification: Specify a register/bit location to be notified; the operator terminal will set the bit to ON.
Select Before Writing to make the operator terminal set the notification to ON when the numeric keypad appears, and set the location to OFF when the numeric keypad disappears.
Select After Writing to make the operator terminal set the notification location to
ON after writing the input value to the Write location.
Display Format:
– Decimal Pt. Position: Specifies the number of digits after the integral part of the number. The maximum is based on the specified format.
– Intergral Digits: The number of the integral part in a number.
– Fractional Digits: The number of decimal digits.
– Display Asterisk Instead of Number: Displays an asterisk instead of input value for security reasons.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
65
Instructions
Validation and Security:
– Input Min.: Sets the minimum input value. A number less than the minimum input value will be warned and rejected.
– Input Max.: Sets the maximum input value. A number greater than the maximum will be warned and rejected.
– User Level: There are 9 user levels, the order is 1 > 2 … > 8 > 9.
– Operation Confirmation: Check this box to display a dialog box on the screen asking for User Confirmation during a waiting time of 5-60 seconds.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing a Set Value Button
On the Attributes tab of the Set Value Button:
1. Shape: Select RaisedBase.
2. Write: Specify controller register W100 to write in. Numeric Entry: Word
Notification: Specify B10 and After Writing. (The controller model is NULL.)
3. Display Format: Check Display Asterisks Instead of Number.
4. Validation and Security: Select 0 fot Input Min., and 2000 for Input Max.
Check Operator Confirmation to require a confirmation after numeric entry.
On the Text tab of the Set Value Button:
5. Enter the desired text, for example Press to set a value between 0-2000, and select White for background color.
The steps above will create a Set Value Button. When the button is pressed, the numeric keypad will be displayed on the screen. After numeric entry, the input value cannot be displayed directly on the Set Value Button. Instead, you can create a
Numeric Display object to display the input value. When the value is changed, B10 is set.
66
The Set Value Button and Numeric Display object
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Set Constant Button
The Set Constant Button is used to make the operator terminal write a constant to the corresponding controller register. The numeric keypad will not be displayed on the screen since the constant has been set in the controller.
Attributes Tab
Value: Specifies the constant value.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a Set Constant Button
Here we use a glass list as an example. When one of the Set Constant Buttons is pressed, the operator terminal will write the specified constant value to the corresponding controller register. In this example, 4 mm Glass represents the constant value 400, 5 mm Glass represents the constant value 500 etc.
The Set Constant Buttons - glass list example
On the Attributes tab of the Set Constant Button:
1. Variable:
Write: Specify controller register W10.
Notification: Specify B10. (The controller model is NULL.)
2. Set Value: Select Word for numeric entry.
Value: Specifiy the constant value 400 for the 4 mm Glass button.
On the Text tab of the Set Constant Button:
3. Enter the text 4 mm Glass and select Green for background color.
The above steps will create a 4 mm Glass button. When clickced, the operator terminal will store the constant value 400 to the register W10.
Follow the same steps to create other glass buttons, using the corresponding constant values.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
67
Instructions
Increment Button
The Increment Button is used to make the operator terminal read a constant variable stored in a controller register. Then a specified constant will be added to the value, before writing it back to the controller register.
Attributes Tab
Function:
– Increment: Select Increment to create an Increment Button; one click increases a specified constant.
– Jog Step: The Increment Button is used to add a specified constant by clicking.
– Limit: Specifies the maximum value written to the register when using the Incre-
ment Button.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing an Increment Button
When clicking the Increment Button, the increased value stored in the controller register will be displayed in the bar graph. The Bar Graph is an object used to display the dynamic data.
68
When the Increment Button is clicked, the level in the Bar Graph is increased
On the Attributes tab of the Increment Button:
1. Variable:
Write: Specify controller register W200 to write in.
Read: Specify W200. (The controller model is NULL.)
2. Shape: Select Raised.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
3. Function: Select Increment, Jog Step: 5 and Limit: 100.
Instructions
Attribute settings for the Increment Button
On the Text tab of the Increment Button:
4. Enter the desired text, for example Increment, and select White for background color.
Clicking the Increment Button five times adds 25 to the controller constant W200
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
69
Instructions
Decrement Button
The Decrement Button is used to make the operator terminal read a constant variable stored in a controller register. Then a specified constant will be subtracted from the value, before writing it back to the controller register.
Attributes Tab
Function:
– Decrement: Select Decrement to create a Decrement Button; one click is one subtraction.
– Jog Step: The Decrement Button is used to subtract a specified constant by clicking.
– Limit: Specifies the minimum value written to the register when using the Decre-
ment Button.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing a Decrement Button
When clicking the Decrement Button, the subtracted constant value stored in the controller register will be displayed in the bar graph. The Bar Graph is an object used to display the dynamic data..
When the Decrement Button is clicked, the level in the Bar Graph is decreased
The steps used to create a Decrement Button are the same as in section
Example of designing an Increment Button
, but remember to change Limit to 0.
70
Clicking the Decrement Button five times subtracts 25 from the controller constant
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Goto Screen Button
The Goto Screen Button is used to change the current screen to another screen.
Attributes Tab
Function:
– Open/Go To: Check this option to create a Goto Screen Button. You can select which screen to open from the drop-down list.
– Enabled By: Only change the screen when the controller register is ON.
Execution:
– On Press: Executes the command (changes the screen) when button is pressed.
– On Release: Executes the command (changes the screen)when button is released.
Appended Functions:
– Change to the Lowest User Level: Sets the current user level as the lowest level
(User Level 9).
– Acknowledge Alarm: Acknowledges the current active alarm when the button is clicked.
– Notify: Notifies the specified bit-location after clicking the button.
Security:
– User Level: There are 9 user levels, the order is 1 > 2 … > 8 > 9.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a Goto Screen Button
In this example, clicking the Goto Screen Button will open Screen_3, assuming that the Screen_3 has been created in the project.
On the Attributes tab of the Goto Screen Button:
1. Shape: Select Raised.
2. Function: Select Screen_3 from the drop-down list.
3. Execution: Select On Press.
On the Text tab of the Goto Screen Button:
4. Enter the desired text, for example Go to Screen 3.
Previous Screen Button
The Previuos Screen Button is used to return to the previous screen in the operator terminal.
Attributes Tab
Function:
– Close/Previous: Check this option to create a Previous Screen Button. You can select which screen to open from the drop-down list.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
.
Example of designing a Previous Screen Button
The steps used to create a Previous Screen Button are the same as in section
Example of designing a Goto Screen Button
, but remember to check the Close/Previous option
for Function.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
71
Instructions
Action Button
The Action button is used to perform a built-in function.
The following actions are available:
Action Description
Contrast Up
Contrast Down
Save contrast
Increases the contrast or brightness of the display.
Decreases the contrast or brightness of the display.
Saves the setting of contrast or brightness.
Password Table
Reenter Password
Displays the password table.
Displays the password table to reenter.
Set Lowest User Level Changes to the lowest user level (level 9).
Print Screen Prints the specified region (HARDCOPY) of current screen.
Goto System Menu
Turn off Backlight
Alarm Ack
Set Time & Date
Changes to the system menu.
Turns off the backlight.
Acknowledges the current active alarm to continue.
Sets the time and date.
Select Language #1-#5 Displays the screen in the specified language, 5 languages available for selection.
All features are not available on all operator terminal models; please refer to
A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing an Action Button
In this example, the Action Button will be used to change the contrast of the display.
On the Attributes tab of the Action Button:
1. Action: Select Contrast Up from the drop-down list.
On the Graphic tab of the Action Button:
2. Bitmap: Select Symbol - ContrastUp.
72
Selecting a symbol for the Action Button
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.4
Numeric Entry
The Numeric Entry is used to write an input value to a controller register, and to display the value on the operator terminal screen. When the button is clicked, a numeric keypad will be displayed on the screen. Enter a value and then press ENT on the keypad. The operator terminal will then write the input value to the specified controller register.
Variable
Write: Specifies the controller register to write to.
Format: BCD, Signed Binary, Unsigned Binary, Hexadecimal, 32-bit Floating-
point and Octal can be selected.
Notification: Specifies a register/bit location to be notified; the operator terminal will set the bit to ON.
– Before Writing: The operator terminal sets the notification location to ON when the numeric keypad appears and sets the location to OFF when the numeric pad disappears.
– After Writing: The operator terminal sets the notification location to ON after writing the input value to the write location.
Display Format
– Fill Leading Zeroes: Select this option to add leading zeros; for example, 5902.1 is displayed as 005902.1.
– Decimal Pt. Position: Specifies the number of digits after the integral part of the number. There are 0-10 digits for selection.
– Fractional Digits: The number of decimal digits.
(Fractional Digits + Integral Digits or Decimal Pt. Position <= the maximum number of digits.)
– Integral Digits: The number of the integral part in a number.
(Fractional Digits + Integral Digits or Decimal Pt. Position <= the maximum number of digits.)
– Scaling: The formula is Y = aX+b.
Note that only the formats Signed Binary, Unsigned Binary and 32-bit Floatingpoint support this option.
Gain: Y = aX, where X = the value stored in controller and Y = operator terminal displayed value.
Offset: If the initial value is not zero, then set the Offset.
Validation and Security
– Variable Input Limits: Set the input limits as variable. The minimum is stored in the bit following the write location; the maximum is stored in the bit following the minimum input value.
For example, if the write location is W10, then the minimum is stored in W11; the maximum is stored in W12.
– Min: Set the minimum input value. Values less than the minimum input value will be warned and rejected.
– Max: Set the maximum input value. Values greater than the maximum will be warned and rejected.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
73
Instructions
Example of designing a basic Numeric Entry button
Perform the following steps to create a basic Numeric Entry button:
A basic Numeric Entry button
1. Frame: Select DE_Module_2 and Black for background color.
2. Variable: Specifiy the controller register W100 for Write to store the value. (The controller model is NULL.) Select Unsigned Binary for Format.
3. Display Format: Select White for character color. Allow 5 Digits in a number.
Validation and Security: Set the minimum input value to 0 and the maximum input value to 60000.
74
Numeric Entry properties in this example
The steps above will create a Numeric Entry button. When the button is clicked, a numeric keypad will be displayed on the screen. After entering a value, the operator terminal will show the input value on the button.
It is also possible to create a Numeric Display object to display the value stored in the controller. Therefore, for this basic numeric entry button, if one enters 10 on the operator terminal, then both the Numeric Entry button and the Numeric Display object will show 10.
A basic Numeric Entry button and a Numeric Display object
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Example of designing a Numeric Entry button with scaling feature
Perform the following steps to create a Numeric Entry button with the Scaling feature.
1. Display Format: Check Scaling. Select Gain: 0.5 and Offset: 2.
All other properties are the same as in the previous example.
Numeric Entry properties in this example
After entering a value, the operator terminal will show the input value on the button.
It is also possible to create a Numeric Display object to display the value stored in the controller. Therefore, for this example with a numeric entry button, if one enters
10 on the operator terminal, then the Numeric Entry button will show 10 and the
Numeric Display object will show 16.
A Numeric Entry button with Scaling feature and a Numeric Display button
(Y = aX + b: X is the value stored in the controller, Y is the input value on an operator terminal; where a = 0.5 and b = 2 here)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
75
Instructions
2.7.5
Character Entry
The function of the Character Entry is used to provide users with alphabetic input and display.
When the button is clicked, an alphabetic keypad will be displayed on the screen. Enter character(s) and then press ENT on the keypad. The operator terminal will then write the input entry in ASCII to the specified controller register.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for complete details.
Variable
Number of Characters: Specifies the number of characters; the maximum is 28.
(2 words in ASCII = 1 word in a controller register)
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
and
Example of designing a Character Entry button:
Perform the following steps to create a basic Character Entry button:
A Character Entry button
1. Variable: Specifiy the controller register W210 for Write to store the value. (The controller model is NULL.) Select 4 for Number of Characters.
2. Security: Set the Waiting Time (Sec.) to 20 seconds.
76
Character Entry properties in this example
The steps above will create a Character Entry button. When the button is clicked, an alphabetic keypad will be displayed on the screen.
Note:
The Alt-key on the keypad is used for Shift functionality.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
After entering the characters, press ENT on the keypad. A dialog box asking for user confirmation appears on the screen.
Using the Character Entry button with user confirmation
2.7.6
List
Each item in the List object corresponds to a designated register value in the controller. The first item represents the register value as 0. The second item represents the register value as 1, and so on. When the user chooses one of the items in the list, the operator terminal will store the corresponding value in the controller register.
The corresponding item will be highlighted in the List object. Furthermore, you can change the value of a controller register by making a selection from the List object.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Variable
Read Only: For display purposes. Users are not able to make a selection from the list.
Write: Writes the value to the specified controller register.
Type of State:
– Value: There are 256 states (0-255). The value of 0 represents state 0; the value of
1 represents state 1, and so on.
– LSB: There are 16 states. If more than 2 bits are to be ON, the controller register will store the value of the lower bit.
Format: This is only available when the Value option is selected. There are three selections: BCD, Signed Binary and Unsigned Binary.
Read: Reads the value from the specified controller register. If the location is not specified, then the operator terminal reads from the Write location.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a List object
Perform the following steps to create a List object:
A List object
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
77
Instructions
On the Attributes tab of the List object:
1. Shape: Select Outlined_2 and White for background color.
2. Variable: Specifiy the controller register W10 for Write to store the value. (The controller model is NULL.) Select Value for Type of State and BCD for Format.
List properties in this example
On the State tab of the List object:
3. Add new states. There are 8 states in this object.
On the Text tab of the List object:
4. Enter the text and set up the format of the display.
78
Adding one text for each state on the Text tab of the List object
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
The steps above will create a List object. When an item from the List object is selected, the operator terminal will write the value associated with the item to the specified controller register. In this example, if the item Peach is selected, the value of the controller register will be 5.
The List object and the display of the controller register value of the item
2.7.7
Drop Down List
Each of the items in the Drop Down List object corresponds to a value of a controller register. Therefore, for a Drop Down List object, the value associated with the displayed item is the current value of the controller register.
Click the object to display the list. A list of items to choose from is dropped down.
You can also change the value of a controller register by making a selection from the
Drop Down List object. Once a selection is made from the object, the list will disappear.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
The properties of the Drop Down List object are similar to those of the List object;
Example of designing a Drop Down List object:
The steps used to create a Drop Down List object are similar to those for a List object. Please see the
Example of designing a List object
for the complete details. Remem-
ber to adjust the length of a list accordingly so that you are able to display all items of the list.
A Drop Down List object
The example below shows a Drop Down List object in the operator terminal. Click the object to display the list. The object will then drop down a list of items from which you can choose. When you select an item from the list, the operator terminal will write the value associated with the item to the controller register. Therefore, if the item Peach is selected, then the value of the controller register will be 5.
Notice that once a selection is made from the object, the list will disappear.
The Drop Down List object and the display of the register value of the item
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
79
Instructions
2.7.8
Indicators
There are two types of indicators; the Multistate Indicator and the Range Indicator.
Multistate Indicator
The Multistate Indicator is used to indicate which state exists with text and/or graphics. Therefore, as the operator terminal reads the contact status or the register value from the controller, it can automatically display the corresponding designed content on the operator terminal screen according to the indicator.
The number of states is as follows:
1. Bit: The maximum number of states is 2
2. Value: The maximum number of states is 256
3. LSB: The maximum number of states is 16
Variable:
Read: Specifies the register/bit location.
– Bit: Two states in all. (Users can input more than two states but only two states will be displayed in the operator terminal.)
– Value: 256 states (0-255) in all ; value 0 represents state 0; value 1 represents state
1; value 2 represents state 2, and so on.
– LSB: 16 states in all; the operator terminal takes the bit number of the smallest bit that is on as the state number.
Format: Specifies the data format. There are three options: BCD, Signed Binary, and
Unsigned Binary.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing a Multistate Indicator object
80
The Multistate Indicator object
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
On the Attributes tab of the Multistate Indicator object:
1. Shape: Select Round_1 and Black for border color.
2. Variable: Specify controller register W60 to read from. (The controller model is
NULL). Select LSB for Format.
The Multistate Indicator attributes in this example
On the State tab of the Multistate Indicator object:
3. Add new states. There are 4 states in this object.
Adding states for the Multistate Indicator
On the Graphic tab of the Multistate Indicator object:
4. Select bitmaps for the different states. This example does not display text, but graphics. These graphics are available in the SYMBOLS.GBF library.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
81
Instructions
On the Text tab of the Multistate Indicator object:
5. Select White for background color.
The above-mentioned steps will create a Multistate Indicator object. In this example,
Numeric Entry buttons are created for the numeric entry written in the controller register. The Multistate Indicator objects will display the corresponding states according to the register value.
82
The Multistate Indicator object displays the corresponding graphic
Therefore, for this example of the object, if one enters 1 in the operator terminal, the
Multistate Indicator object will show state 0; if one enters 4, the object will show state 2 ; if one enters 8, the object will show state 3.
The Format selected in this example is LSB; please refer to the following table:
Numeric Entry
(LSB)
1
Bit State
0 bit is ON; the others are OFF
Multistate
Indicator
State 0
Graphics
2 1 bit is ON; the others are OFF State 1
4 2 bit is ON; the others are OFF State 2
8 3 bit is ON; the others are OFF State 3
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Range Indicator
A Range Indicator displays one of several indicator labels depending on the register value. The operator terminal reads register values from the controller and automatically calculates the difference according to the boundary value of current states. Then the contents of current status are displayed on the operator terminal screen according to the calculated results.
Read value from controller Calculated result Display the corresponding states
Ranges:
Variable Limits: Specifies the minimum value of the ranges to be read from registers following the read location. If the Read address is Wn, the minimum value of Range
# 0 is stored in Wn+1, the minimum of Range # 1 is stored in Wn+2, and so on.
Constant Limits: The minimum of the ranges is constant.
– Range #: The number of ranges, 15 ranges at most.
– Minimum: The minimum of ranges.
Note:
Number of ranges = number of states -1.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a Range Indicator object
The Range Indicator object
On the Attributes tab of the Range Indicator object:
1. Shape: Select Raised_2.
2. Variable: Specify controller register W90 to read from. (The controller model is
NULL).
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
83
Instructions
3. Ranges: Select Constant Limits and minimum 3000 of Range # 0; minimum
2500 of Range # 1.
The Attributes tab of the Range Indicator in this example
On the State tab of the Range Indicator object:
4. Add new states. There are 3 states in this object.
On the Text tab of the Multistate Indicator object:
5. Enter the texts for the states.
Entering texts for the different states
The above-mentioned steps will create a Range Indicator object. In this example, a
Numeric Entry button is used to input value in the controller register, and a Range
Indicator object is used to calculate the result and display its corresponding state associated with the specified range.
84
The Range Indicator object displays the corresponding state
If you enter the input value 3500, the corresponding range is Range # 0. Therefore, the Range Indicator object will show Success.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.9
Numeric Display
The Numeric Display object is used to display the register value stored in controller.
This object does not support click-button functionality.
Variable
Read: Specifies a register/bit location.
Format: There are BCD, Signed Binary, Unsigned Binary, Hexadecimal, 32-bit
Floating-point and Octal formats.
Range
Edit button: When clicking this button, the displayed dialog box provides a display showing high/low range.
Editing Numeric Range
– None: No high/low limit.
– Constant: Enter the constant variable of high/low limit.
– Register: Read high/low limit from register. If the read location is Wn, the high limit is stored in Wn+1 and the low limit is stored in Wn+2.
– Display Format: Specifies the format to display when the variable is equal or more/less than high/low limit.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
.
Example of designing a Numeric Display object
1. Frame: Select DD_Module_2 and White for background.
2. Variable: Specify controller register W100 to read from. (The controller model is
NULL)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
85
Instructions
3. Display Format: Select Blue for character color.
Numeric Display properties in this example
4. Range: Click the Edit button and select Constant. Specify 100 for High Limit and 30 for Low Limit. Select Red for character color for High Range, and Light
Blue for character color for Low Range.
Numeric Entry buttons are used to influence Numeric Display objects.
In this example, a Numeric Entry button is used to input a value in the controller register. The variable will display different text colors on the screen according to its range: If the variable is less than or equal to 30, it shows Light Blue text; if the variable is greater than or equal to 100, it shows Red text ; if the variable is between 30 and 100, it shows the original setting Blue text.
86
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.10 Character Display
The Character Display object is used to provide an alphanumeric display for an
ASCII variable in the controller register. Note that it does not support click-button functionality.
Variable
Number of Characters: Specifies the number of characters to display. It can have up to 28 characters, limited by the width of the object.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a Character Display object
The following steps are used to create a Character Display object; this function can be applied in the factory for product management.
A Character Display object
1. Frame: Select Outlined_2 , Blue for border color and White for background.
2. Variable: Specify controller register W20 to read from. (The controller model is
NULL). Specify 10 for Number of Characters.
3. Display Format: Select Dark Blue for character color.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
87
Instructions
2.7.11 Message Display Objects
There are six types of Message Display objects: Prestored Message, Moving Sign,
Data Terminal, Time Display, Data Display and Day-of-Week Display.
Note:
Message Display objects contain only text; Indicator Buttons can have both text and graphic, however.
Prestored Message Display
The Prestored Message Display object is used to make the operator terminal read the contact state (ON/OFF) or the register value from the controller and automatically display designed content on the operator terminal screen according to the state/value.
Please see the section
Example of designing a Prestored Message Display object
On the Attributes tab of the Message Display object:
1. Frame: Select Recessed_1 and Dark Blue for border color.
2. Variable: Specify W20 to read from.
88
Setting attributes for the Message Display object in this example
On the State tab of the Message Display object:
3. Add 8 new states.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
On the Text tab of the Message Display object:
4. Enter the desired text and specify the text format.
Instructions
Adding texts for the 8 states in this example
The above-mentioned steps will create a Prestored Message Display object. When the Multistate button (under the Prestored Message Display object) is clicked once, the operator terminal writes the command to the controller for state change. When the state is changed, the Prestored Message Display will display the corresponding state.
Prestored Message Display objects used together with Multistate buttons
For instance, when the state is Blueberry; the Prestored Message Display object will display the corresponding content Blueberry. When the state is Starfruit, the Pre-
stored Message Display object will display the corresponding content Starfruit.
Moving Sign
The Moving Sign object is used to display content one by one, from right to left.
When the operator terminal reads the value from a bit-location (ON/OFF) or register in the controller, the Moving Sign object will display its contents or message according to the corresponding state on the screen.
Speed
Number of Characters Per Shift: Specifies the number of characters per shift.
Time Between Shifts (sec.): Specifies the time between shifts in seconds.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
89
Instructions
Example of designing a Moving Sign object
On the Attributes tab of the Moving Sign object:
1. Frame: Select DD_Module_3.
2. Variable: Specify W80for Read. (The controller model is NULL). Select Value and Unsigned Binary format.
3. Speed: Select 1 for Number of Characters Per Shift and 0,5 seconds for Time
Between Shifts.
Setting attributes for the Moving Sign object in this example
On the State tab of the Moving Sign object:
4. 3 states are used in this example.
On the Text tab of the Moving Sign object:
5. Enter the desired text and specify the text format for the states.
90
Adding texts for the 3 states in this example
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
The above-mentioned steps will create a Moving Sign object.
Instructions
A Moving Sign object used together with a Multistate button
The Multistate button is designed to write the command to the controller when clicked. Then, the Moving Sign object will display the corresponding content according the current state.
For example, if the state is Morning, the Moving Sign object will display Good
Morning Good Morning Good Morning. The text here is displayed revolving, moving through characters from right to the left.
Data Terminal
The Data Terminal object is used to simulate an ASCII terminal. The operator terminal can be connected with another specified communication port and the specified communication parameters to the data terminal displayed using ASCII /HEX mode.
Remember to set the ASCII Device to communicate and specify the communication port.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Variable
Read: Specifies a bit-location to read from. The ASCII Device provides RX, RXSTS,
TX and TXSTS contacts.
Display
Mode: Displays the terminal data in ASCII/HEX mode.
Data Buffer
Type: Selecting Local displays the current terminal data, but the last displayed data is not included when the screen is changed. Selecting Global displays the terminal data, including the last one when the screen is changed.
Size: Specifies the number of rows of terminal data.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
91
Instructions
Example of designing a Terminal Data object
1. Click Application/Workstation Setup to set ASCII Device as Controller/PLC on the General tab of the Application Properties dialog box.
The General tab of the Application Properties dialog box
2. Specify the port/method used for the connection on the Connection tab.
92
The Connection tab of the Application Properties dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Data Teminal attributes:
3. Shape: Select Outlined_2 and Black for color.
4. Variable: Select RX.(The controller is an ASCII Device)
5. Display: Select ASCII mode to display terminal data.
6. Data Buffer: Select Local.
The above-mentioned steps will create a Data Terminal object that displays terminal data in ASCII mode.
Time Display
The Time Display object is used to make the operator terminal read the time value of the internal real time clock (RTC) and to display the content directly on the operator terminal screen.
Display Format
HH:MM:SS: Displays Hours:Minutes:Seconds
HH:MM: Displays Hours:Minutes
Example of a Time Display object
See section
Example of the Time, Date and Day-of-Week Display objects
.
Date Display
The Date Display obejct is used to make the operator terminal read the date value of the internal real time clock (RTC) and to display the content directly on the operator terminal screen.
Display Format
MM/DD/YY: The format is Month/Date/Year.
DD/MM/YY: The format is Date/Month/Year.
DD.MM.YY: The format is Date.Month.Year.
Example of a Date Display object
See section
Example of the Time, Date and Day-of-Week Display objects
.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
93
Instructions
Day-of-Week Display
The Day-of-Week Display object is used to make the operator terminal read the day of week value from the internal real time clock (RTC) and to display the content directly on the operator terminal screen.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for complete details.
The operator terminal will display the date of week automatically.
94
The Text tab of the Day-of-Week Display object
Example of the Time, Date and Day-of-Week Display objects
The Time Display, Date Display and Day-of-Week Display objects
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.12 Bar Graph
There are two types of Bar Graphs; Normal and Deviation.
Normal Bar Graph
The Normal Bar Graph is used to make the operator terminal read the value of the controller register, to convert its data into a bar graph, and then to display the bar graph in the operator terminal.
Variable
Min.: Specifies the minimum value the bar graph can display.
Max.: Specifies the maximum value the bar graph can display.
Variable target/range limits: Select this option if the target value and the range limits are read from the controller.
The Target Variable is stored in the bit-location that follows the Read. The High
Limit is stored in the bit location that follows the Target Variable. The Low Limit is stored in the bit location that follows the High Limit.
Register
Example:
X
Read
W10
X+1 X+2
Target Variable High Limit
W11 W12
X+3
Low Limit
W13
Display Format
Upward, Downward, Rightward, and Leftward: Selects the direction of the bar graph.
Color: Specifies the color of the bar graph.
Pattern: Specifies the pattern style to display.
Target: Sets the target to display.
– Value: Specifies the constant target value.
– Color: Specifies the color of target line.
Ranges: Select this option to fill the graph with a different color when the register value is beyond a normal range.
– Low Range: Specifies the color to fill the graph with if the register value is equal to or less than the low range limit.
– Limit: Specifies a constant for the low range limit.
– High Range: Specifies the color to fill the graph with if the register value is greater than or equal to the high range limit.
– Limit: Specify a constant for the high range limit.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a Bar Graph object
1. Frame: Select Recessed_1 and White for background color.
2. Variable: Specify @5 (Local Internal Memory) for Read and Unsigned Binary for format.
3. Set Min. to -32,768 and Max. to 32,767.
4. Check the option Variable target/range limits.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
95
Instructions
5. Check Ranges and select Blue for Low range and Red for High range.
The attributes of the Bar Graph object in this example
When the register value is equal to or less than the low limit, the graph will be filled with blue color; when the register value is equal or greater than the high limit, the graph will be filled with red color.
96
Bar Graphs indicating different limits using Numeric Entry objects
The Numeric Entry objects are used to set the high/low limits. There is a Scale to the left of the bar graphs. The Low Limit here is -15000 and the High Limit is
15000 using the following configuration:
Variable < -15000 fills graph with blue
Variable between -15000 and 15000 fills graph with black
Variable >15000 fills graph with red
Deviation Bar Graph
The Deviation Bar Graph is used to make the operator terminal read the values of the controller register and to compare them with the normal value. Then the operator terminal converts the difference and presents it on a Deviation Bar Graph in the operator terminal.
Variable
Variable Std Value/Deviation Limit: Select this option if the standard value and deviation limit are read from the controller. If Read address is W10, Standard Value will be stored in W11; Deviation Limit will be stored in W12.
Display Format
Vertical, Horizontal: Selects the direction of the bar graph.
Standard Value: Specifies the constant standard value. The standard value will be a date line on the bar graph.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Display Deviation Limit: Select this option to fill the bar graph with selected color when the difference of the register value and the standard value is beyond the limit.
– Limit: Specifies the constant limit.
Difference Value: =¦Variable - Standard Value¦
– Color: Specifies the color to fill the graph with when the difference of the register value and the standard value is beyond the limit.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
.
Example of designing a Deviation Bar Graph
A Deviation Bar Graph shows the difference to the set standard value
1. Frame: Select Recessed_1 and Yellow for background color.
2. Variable: Specify @5 (Local Internal Memory) for Read and Signed Binary for
Format.
3. Set Min. to -100 and Max. to 100.
4. Display Format: Select horizontal direction for the Deviation Bar Graph.
5. The Standard Value is 20 on this deviation bar graph.
6. Specify that the Red color is to fill the graph when the difference between the register value and the standard value is beyond the limit 60.
The attributes of the Deviation Bar Graph in this example
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
97
Instructions
2.7.13 Trend Graph
The Trend Graph is used to read a series of values from the related controller register.
Then the operator terminal converts these values and presents them in a trend graph in the operator terminal.
Suppose that the register is Wn to be read from, with three curves in total. The data will be read as follows format:
Value in Wn = m is the real sampling points;
Value in Wn+1 is the first point of Y direction on the curve #1;
Value in Wn+2 is the first point of Y direction on the curve #2;
Value in Wn+3 is the first point of Y direction on the curve #3;
Value in Wn+4 is the 2nd point of Y direction on the curve #1;
Value in Wn+5 is the 2nd point of Y direction on the curve #2;
Value in Wn+6 is the 2nd point of Y direction on the curve #3;
:
: and so on. The operator terminal reads all controller registers from Wn to Wn+3m.
For example, if the value in Wn is m = 25 sampling points; the operator terminal will read data from 76 (=3 × 25 + 1) controller registers.
Control
To control the trend graph via the controller.
Trigger Flag #: The trigger flag number of the trend graph is 12-15 bits in CFR. The operator terminal reads data from the controller and displays the trend graph when the trigger flag turns on.
Clear Flag #: The clear flag number of the trend graph is bits 8-11 in CFR. The operator terminal clears the trend graph when the clear flag turns on.
Display Format
Number of Points: Specifies the maximum number to display on the Y-direction.
Number of Grids: Specifies the number of evenly spaced horizontal grids to be displayed.
Grid Color: Specifies the color of the horizontal grids.
Curve # 1 - Curve # 4: Provides four curves for editing. When the Edit button is clicked, the dialog box below will appear:
98
Editing Display Format of Trend Curves
Minimum: Specifies the value corresponding to the lowest point on the trend graph.
When the data is equal to or less than the Minimum, the operator terminal places the dot at the bottom pixel of the drawing area of the trend graph.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Maximum: Specifies the value corresponding to the highest point on the trend graph. When the register is equal to or greater than the Maximum, the operator terminal places the dot at the top pixel of the drawing area of the trend graph.
Pen Color: Specifies the color of the trend curve.
Line Style: Specifies the line style of the trend curve.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a Trend Graph object
A Trend Graph
1. Frame: Select Outlined_2 and White for background color.
2. Variable: Specify @100 (Local Internal Memory) for Read and Unsigned Binary for Format.
3. Control: Select 1 for Trigger Flag # and for Clear Flag #.
4. Display Format: Specify 10 for Number of Points.
Trend Graph attributes in this example
5. Check Curve #1 and click Edit. Set Minimum to 0 and Maximum to 100.
Select Blue for Pen Color.
6. Check Curve #2 and click Edit. Set Minimum to 0 and Maximum to 100.
Select Red for Pen Color.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
99
Instructions
2.7.14 XY Chart
The XY Chart is used to read a series of values from the related controller register.
Then the operator terminal converts these values and presents them on an XY chart in the operator terminal.
Suppose that the register to read from is Wn, with two curves in all. The data will be read as follows:
Value in Wn = m are the real sampling points;
Value in Wn+1 is the first point of the X-axis on curve #1;
Value in Wn+2 is the first point of the Y-axis on curve #1;
Value in Wn+3 is the first point of the X-axis on curve #2;
Value in Wn+4 is the first point of the Y-axis on curve #2;
Value in Wn+5 is the 2nd point of the X-axis on curve #1;
Value in Wn+6 is the 2nd point of the Y-axis on curve #1;
:
:
Value in Wn+7 is the 2nd point of the X-axis on curve #2;
Value in Wn+8 is the 2nd point of the Y-axis on curve #2; and so on. The operator terminal reads all controller registers from Wn to Wn+2m.
For example, if the value in Wn is m = 15 sampling points, the operator terminal will read data from 61 (=2 × 2 × 15 + 1) controller registers.
Control
To control the trend graph by controller.
Trigger Flag #: The trigger flag number of the trend graph is bits 12-15 in CFR. The operator terminal reads data from controller and displays the XY chart when the trigger flag turns on.
Clear Flag #: The clear flag number of the trend graph is bits 8-11 in CFR. The operator terminal clears the trend graph when the clear flag turns on.
Display
Points, Line, Area over X-axis and Area over Y-axis: See the illustration below.
100
Maximum Number of Points: Specifies the maximum number of points to display on the XY chart.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Grids:
– Number of H Lines: Specifies the number of horizontal lines.
– Number of V Lines: Specifies the number of vertical lines.
– Color: Specifies the color of the lines.
Data Set # 1 - Data Set # 2: When the Edit button is clicked, the dialog box below will appear:
– Vertical Min. and Vertical Max.: Specifies the minimum and maximum values for the Y-axis.
– Horizontal Min. and Vertical Max.: Specifies the minimum and maximum values for the X-axis.
– Color: Specifies the color for the point/line.
– Point Size: Specifies the size of the point to display.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing an XY Chart object
An XY Chart
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
101
Instructions
1. Frame: Select Outlined_2 and White for background color.
2. Variable: Specify @100 (Local Internal Memory) for Read and Unsigned Binary for Format.
3. Control: Select 1 for Trigger Flag # and Clear Flag #.
4. Display: Select Line.
5. Maximum Number of Points: 5. .
XY Chart attributes in this example
6. Check Data Set #1 and click Edit. Set Vertical Min. and Horizontal Min. to 0, and Vertical Max. and Horizontal Max. to 100. Select Blue for Point/Line
Color.
7. Check Data Set #2 and click Edit. Set Vertical Min. and Horizontal Min. to 0, and Vertical Max. and Horizontal Max. to 100. Select Red for Point/Line
Color.
102
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.15 Panel Meters
There are two types of panel meters - Round and Rectangular.
Round Panel Meter
The Round Panel Meter is used to make the operator terminal read the value from the controller register and to reflect the value on the Round Panel Meter object on the screen.
Needle
Color: Specifies the needle’s color.
Sweep Angles (deg.): 300 or 360 degrees can be selected.
Scale
Color: Specifies the color used to display the scale.
Number of major ticks: Specifies the number of major ticks on the scale. If the number is less than 2, no ticks are displayed.
Number of minor ticks: Specifies the number of minor ticks on the scale.
Display axis: Check this option to display an arc as the axis of the scale.
Display mark: Check this option to display marks on the scale.
Font: 8 x 8 or 8 x 16 can be selected.
Number of digits: Specifies the number of digits, including precision and scale.
Decimal point position: Specifies the position of the mark’s digit. If the number is
0, no decimal point is displayed.
Min. and Max.: Specifies the minimum and maximum number of marks.
Target/Range: Click the Edit button to display the dialog box below:
– Variable target/range limits: The target value and range limits are read from the controller. The target value is stored in a bit-location which is next to the Read location. The low limit is next to the target value. The low limit is next to the high limit. When the Read location is specified as W10, the target value is stored in
W11; the low limit is stored in W12; the high limit is stored in W13.
– Display target indicator: Check this option to display target indicator.
Target value: Specifies the target value.
Target needle color: Specifies the color of the needle.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
103
Instructions
– Display range scale: Specifies the color of the range scale to display.
Low Range Color and High Range Color: Specifies the color to display on the scale when the value is less/greater than low/high range.
Low Limit and High Limit: Specifies the low limit and high limit constants.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of designing a Round Panel Meter object
A Round Panel Meter
1. Variable: Specify @0 (Local Internal Memory) for Read and Signed Binary for
Format.
2. Set Min. to -30000 and Max. to 30000.
3. Needle: Select 300 degrees for Sweep Angle.
4. Scale: Set Number of Major Ticks to 7 and Number of Minor Ticks to 3.
5. Check Display mark and set Min. to -30 and Max. to 30.
104
The attributes of the Round Panel Meter in this example
6. Click Edit for Target/Range and check Display range scale. Set the Low range
limit to -10000 and Blue color; the High range limit to 10000 and Red color.
Rectangular Panel Meter
The properties of the Rectangular Panel Meter are the same as for the Round Panel
Meter; please see section
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.7.16 Pie Graph
The Pie Graph is used to make the operator terminal read the register values in the controller. Then it converts the values into a 360 degree pie graph and displays the graph on the operator terminal screen.
Display Format
Starting angle: Specifies the original angle of the pie graph.
Pie color: Specifies the color used to fill the pie graph.
Bkg color: Specifies the color of the unfilled part of the pie graph.
Style: Specifies the pattern style used for filling the pie graph.
Border: Check this option to display the pie graph with a border.
Color: Specifies the border color of the pie graph.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
Example of designing a Pie Graph object
The Pie Graph object
1. Variable: Specify W60 for Read and BCD for Format.
2. Set 0 for Min. and 100 for Max.
3. Display Format: Set Starting Angle to 0.
4. Select Pie color, Bkg color, Style and Border color.
Attributes for the Pie Graph object in this example
A Pie Graph object is drawn from (+) X-axis (starting angle = 0). When the input value is 20, the area of the pie is one-fifth of a circle (= 20/100).
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
105
Instructions
2.7.17 Dynamic Graphics
There are five types of dynamic graphics: Animated Graphic, GIF Graphic, State
Graphic, Dynamic Circle and Dynamic Rectangle.
Animated Graphic
The Animated Graphic object enables you to control a graphic, including its position and moving-path on the operator terminal screen, whether via controller or not.
For instance, the controller can control the graphic movement along the X-axis, Yaxis, or displaying different graphics.
Attributes Tab
Not Controlled by PLC: Check this option and the graph is not controlled by the controller.
Graphic State:
– PLC controlled: Displays the graphic states controlled by the controller.
– Location dependent: Displays the different states according to the location.
– Auto change: Changes the graphic state automatically.
Rate (Once per): Specifies the rate at which to change the graphic state.
Path:
– PLC controlled: Controls the object’s movement path via the controller.
– Horizontal line: Moves the object along a horizontal line.
– Horizontal marquee: Moves the object along a horizontal line with marquee.
Check Duplication to move duplicated graphics along a horizontal line.
– Vertical Line: Moves the object along a vertical line.
– Vertical marquee: Moves the object along a vertical line with marquee.
Check Duplication to move duplicated objects along a vertical line.
– Connected Lines: Moves the object along the route of connected lines.
Path: Double-click the left key on the object to display the movement path.
Path Point: Right-click on the object to select Add Path Point or Delete Path
Point from the drop-down list for the connected lines setup. Please see section
Example of creating horizontal/vertical line as a path
for complete details.
Note that a curve path can be configured with various path points.
– Still: Changes the state without movement.
Movement:
– Rate (pixels/sec.): Specifies the rate of movement.
One-way: Moves the object in one-way mode.
Two-way: Moves the object in two-way mode.
Duplication: Select this option to move duplicate objects with marquee; the number of copies can be specified as well.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
State and Graphic Tab
106
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Path Tab
– The Graphic State is Location dependent:
On the Path tab, this feature enables you to specify the graphic states to be changed according to different locations. For instance, the point # 0 displays the graphic state in state # 0; the point # 1 displays the graphic state in state # 1.
– The Graphic State is Auto Change:
On the Path tab, the object changes its state along the specified path. You can set the starting point and ending point of the path to be displayed on this tab.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
107
Instructions
Example of creating horizontal/vertical line as a path
1. Double-click on the object to display the movement path.
2. Move the cursor to the point, then click to draw the movement path. The revised path is marked with a red line.
3. Click elsewhere on the screen to display the object’s graphics.
108
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Example of creating connected lines as a path
1. Double-click on the object to display the movement path.
2. Click on the points of the connected lines (icon is ) to draw the movement path. The revised path is marked with a red line.
3. Move the cursor to any one of the points and right-click to select Add Path
Point or Delete Path Point from the drop-down list.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
109
Instructions
4. In the same fashion, the way to edit a new path is to click the added path point to drag a movement path, which is marked with red lines.
Example of Animated Graphic object Not Controlled by controller,
One-way, Horizontal Line
On the Attributes tab of the Animated Graphic object:
1. Check the Not Controlled by PLC option.
2. The graphic state is Location dependent.
3. The path is Horizontal line.
4. The movement rate is 10 pixels/sec. and the direction is One-way.
On the Path tab of the Animated Graphic object:
5. This object is one state; and the graphic is oil.bmp.
110
Therefore, this animated graphic is not controlled by the controller and moves along horizontal line at 10 pixels/sec. in one-way mode; the graphics are both oil.bmp.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Example of Animated Graphic object Not Controlled by controller,
Two-way, Horizontal Marquee
On the Attributes tab of the Animated Graphic object:
1. Check the Not Controlled by PLC option.
2. The graphic state is Location dependent.
3. The path is Horizontal marquee.
4. The movement rate is 60 pixels/sec. and the direction is Two-way.
On the Path tab of the Animated Graphic object:
5. Since the graphic state is location dependent, two states are set up.
Therefore, this object is not controlled by the controller and moves along a horizontal marquee at 60 pixels/sec. This object will move back and forth when it comes to the end point.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
111
Instructions
Moving to the right along a horizontal marquee
Moving to the left along a horizontal marquee
Example of Animated Graphic object Not Controlled by controller,
Auto Change, Connected Line
On the Attributes tab of the Animated Graphic object:
1. Check the Not Controlled by PLC option.
2. The graphic state is Auto change and the Rate is 0.1 sec.
3. The path is Connected lines.
4. The movement rate is 60 pixels/sec.; the direction is Two-way.
112
On the Graphic tab of the Animated Graphic object:
5. Setup 8 graphics for auto change. The example uses 8 wheels with different angles to create a rolling image when the graphic state is changed automatically.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
6. Add more points to make the movement path smoother.
Instructions
Therefore, this animated graphic object is not controlled by the controller and moves at 60 pixels/sec. back and forth along the curve. The graphic state is set to auto change to show a rolling effect.
Moving along the curve with auto change in two-way
GIF Graphic
The GIG Graphic displays GIF graphics, controlled by the controller or not.
Graphic: Selects the graphic to display from the drop-down list. The graphic will appear in the View window.
Profile: Modifies the location and size of objects.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of designing a GIF Graphic object
1. Select a GIF graphic form the Graphic drop-down list; specify the controller register from which to read (if the option Controlled by PLC is checked) and modify its profile.
Selecting a GIF graphic
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
113
Instructions
The GIF graphic appears on the object
State Graphic
The State Graphic constantly displays one of several bitmaps depending on the state of the controller register.
Attributes
States:
– Auto Change: Check this option to change the graphic automatically.
Change Rate (Hz): Specifies the rate of change.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of creating a State Graphic object
114
A State Graphic object
On the Attributes tab of the State Graphic object:
1. Variable: Specify @300 (Local Internal Memory) for Read and Value to be displayed.
2. Select Unsigned Binary for Format.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
3. Check the Auto Change option; Change Rate (Hz) is 0.5.
Instructions
On the State and Graphic tabs of the State Graphic object:
4. There are 14 states in all. Add states on the State tab and select specific graphic to display on the Graphic tab.
Therefore, the object changes its state repeatedly every 0.5 sec and is controlled by the controller. A pumping effect will be generated on the operator terminal screen.
The object shows auto change (ex. state 0-2)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
115
Instructions
Dynamic Circles
The Dynamic Circles object changes its position, radius and color according to controller registers.
116
Variable Central Point: The position of the central point is controlled by the controller.
Variable Radius: The length of the radius is controlled by the controller.
Variable Color: The color of the object is controlled by the controller.
Display Format: Specifies the format of the object to display.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
.
Example of using Dynamic Circle
Suppose that the dynamic circle’s central point, radius, and color are controlled by the controller. The Read address is W430.
The operator terminal can read four pieces of data simultaneously at most, and the read addresses here are W430, W431, W432, and W433. The following is the table for controller addresses and graphic properties.
Re-central
Point
Re-radius
Fix Color
Re-central
Point
Re-radius
Fix Color
Re-central
Point
Re-central
Point
Re-radius Re-radius
Re-Coloring Fix Color
Fix Central
Point
Re-radius
Fix Color
Re-central
Point
Fix Central
Point
Fix Radius Fix Radius
Fix Color Re-Coloring
Wn= Radius Wn= Radius Wn= Radius Wn= Radius Wn= X
Wn+1= X Wn+1= X Wn+1= Color Wn+1= Y
Wn+2= Y
Wn+3= Color
Wn+2= Y Wn+2= Color
Wn= X
Wn+1= X
Wn= Color
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Dynamic Rectangle
The Dynamic Rectangle object changes its position, radius, and color according to controller registers.
Variable Position: The position of the object is controlled by the controller.
Variable Size: The length of the object is controlled by the controller.
Variable Color: The color of the object is controlled by the controller.
Anchor Point: Specifies the anchor point for the dynamic rectangle whose position is variable and size is fixed.
Display Format: Specifies the format of the dynamic rectangle to display.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the section
Example of using Dynamic Rectangle
Suppose that the position, size, and color are variable and are controlled by the controller. The Read address is W420.
The operator terminal reads five simultaneous pieces of data from the controller at most. The read addresses here are W420, W421, W422, W423, and W424. The following is the table of controller addresses and graphic properties.
Re-position Re-position Fix Position Fix Color
Re-size Re-size Re-size Re-size
Re-Coloring Fix Color
Fix position
Fix Size
Re-position Fix Position
Fix Size
Re-Coloring Re-Coloring Re-Coloring Fix Color
Fix Size
Fix Color
W420=Width W420=Width W420= Width W420=Width W420=X
W421=Height W421= Height W421= Height W421=Height W421=Y
W422=X
W423=Y
W422=X
W423=Y
W422=Color W422=Color
W424=Color
W420=X
W421=Y
W420= Color
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
117
Instructions
2.7.18 Historical Display
The Historical Display drop-down list includes the following: Historical Trend
Graph, Historical Data Table and Historical Event Table.
The Historical Display data is stored in logging buffers, so you should assign its area and size first. The logging buffer is used to store the sampling data in the operator terminal battery backup RAM.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for complete details.
Logging Buffer
Select the Logging Buffers tab from Application/Workstation Setup.
118
The Logging Buffers tab
Source Address: Specifies the starting address to read from, e.g. W20 is starting address of a block of controller registers from which the logging buffer reads from.
Size: Specifies the size of a record to read from at one time, e.g. Size = 4 represents 4 words = W20, W21, W22, W23.
Total: Specifies the total to store in, e.g. 1500 represents that the operator terminal reads 4 words each time, sampling 1500 times in total.
Time/Date: Check these boxes to record the Time/Date while sampling.
Auto Stop: Check this box to stop the sampling when it reaches the specified total =
1500. If this option is not selected, the first piece of data will be overwritten when the 1501st piece of data records is recorded.
Triggered By: Select Timer to trigger periods of fixed time or select controller to be triggered by the controller. If PLC is selected for triggering, it is triggered by the specified corresponding bit-locations, Wn+2, Wn+3, and Wn+4.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Time Interval: Specify how often the logging buffer gets a record of data from the timer. Unit: seconds.
After completing the setup on the Logging Buffers tab , you can create three types of Historical Display objects:
Historical Trend Graph
The operator terminal may have a fixed sampling period or the controller may initiate that data be read from the specified registers and then store the data in the logging buffers in the operator terminal memory. After a sampling period, the data is then converted to continuous curve(s) and displayed on the operator terminal.
Data
Logging Buffer #: Specifies the number of the logging buffer where the historical data is stored, numbered 1 to 12.
Format: BCD, Signed Binary or Unsigned Binary.
Time/Date
Display Date and Display Time: Checking the boxes displays date and time; click
Format button to setup.
Color: Specifies the color of characters to be displayed.
Display Format
Number of Grids: Specifies how many evenly spaced horizontal lines shall be displayed.
Grid Color: Specifies the color of the horizontal grids.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
119
Instructions
Curve #1 - #4: There are four curves to be selected. Click the Edit button to display the following dialog box:
Word No: Specifies the number of the words to display on the historic trend curve.
Minimum and Maximum: Specifies the value corresponding to the lowest and highest point on the historical trend curve.
Pen Color: Specifies the color used to draw the trend curve.
Line Style: Specifies the line style of the trend curve.
Example of designing a Historical Trend Graph
120
The Historical Trend Graph
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
1. First assign logging buffer size and area for Logging Buffer #1 on the Logging
Buffers tab in Application/Workstation Setup:
Source Address: @20
Size: 4
Total: 3000
Check Time and Date
Triggered By: Time
Time Interval: 1
Check Non-volatile.
Please see section
For the Historical Trend Graph object, select the following properties:
The Historical Trend Graph properties
2. Frame: Select Recessed_1 and Black for background color.
3. Data: Select Logging Buffer #1 and Unsigned Binary for Format.
4. Display Format: Specify 11 grids and Green for Grid Color.
5. Check four curves to display; Curve #1 displays the data record stored in the word 0, Curve #2 displays the data record stored in the word 1 etc.
Properties for Historical Trending Curve #1
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
121
Instructions
6. Set Minimum to 0 and Maximum to 65535. Specify a different color for each curve.
The result of the settings in the above example: Displaying data stored in logging buffer #1.
Historical Data Table
The operator terminal may have a fixed sampling period or the controller may initiate a data read from the specified registers and then store the data in the logging buffers in the operator terminal memory. After a sampling period, the data is then converted to numeric data tables and displayed in the operator terminal.
122
Historical Data Table properties
Display Format
Number of Data Field: Specify how many data fields to display; up to 10 data fields.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Clicking the Field Attribute button displays the dialog box below:
Instructions
Starting Position: Specifies the position of a data field to display.
Note:
If the starting position is 0 for Field No. 1; the time will be displayed in Field No. 1, the date will be displayed in Field No. 2, and the first data field will be displayed in
Field No. 3. If there is no time/date displayed, the first data field will be displayed in
Field No. 1.
Word No.: 0-31 characters can be specified.
Data Size: 1 represents one-word; 2 represents double-word.
Data Format: Select BCD, Signed Binary, Unsigned Binary or Hexadecimal.
Display Color: Specifies the character color of a data field.
Leading Zeros: Checking this box to displays leading zeros.
Decimal Pt. Position: Specifies the number of digits following the decimal point.
Int. Digits: Specifies how many digits to the left of the decimal point.
Frac. Digits: Specifies how many digits to the right of the decimal point.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
123
Instructions
Example of designing a Historical Data Table
A Historical Data Table
Suppose that there is historical data stored in logging buffer #1.
Select the following properties for the Historical Data Table object:
1. Frame: Select Outlined_2 and Black for border color.
2. Data: Select Logging Buffer #1 to read data from.
3. Time/Date: Check both boxes.
4. Display Format: Select 4 data fields. Click Field Attribute.
124
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
5. Make settings according to above.
The result of the settings in the above example: Displaying data stored in logging buffer #1.
Historical Event Table
The operator terminal may set a fixed sampling period or the controller may initiate a data read from the specified registers or the related bits in LSB. Thereafter, the data is converted into pre-defined message text(s) and then displayed line-by-line in the operator terminal.
The Historical Event Table
Data
Logging Buffer #: Specifies the number of the logging buffer where the historical data is stored, numbered 1 to 12.
Type: Select Value; 256 states in all (0-255), where 0 represents state 0; 1 represents state 1 etc. or LSB; 16 states in all, the operator terminal takes the bit number of the lowest bit that is ON as the state number.
Format: Only available when Value is selected, and the formats are BCD, Unsigned
Binary or Signed Binary.
For properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
125
Instructions
2.7.19 Alarm Display
There are four types of Alarm Display: Alarm History, Active Alarm List, Alarm Fre-
quency Table and Alarm Marquee.
To use the Alarm Display objects, you must set up the address of the alarm block and its parameters. The operator terminal reads the value stored in the controller and displays its corresponding messages. Up to 512 messages can be set. Please see section
for information about setting up alarms.
The objects are not available on all operator terminal models; please see
- H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
After completing alarm setup, the four types of Alarm Display objects can be used.
Alarm History Table
The operator terminal reads the reference bits in the controller in fixed periods and then activates the corresponding alarm messages. Thereafter, this the operator terminal can show the alarm history as an Alarm History Table.
Attributes Tab
126
Status Display
– Date and Time: Check the boxes to display the date and time and click the Format button to specify formats.
– Alarm Number: Check this box to display the alarm number.
– Color: Specifies the color of the message.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Text Tab
On this tab, Font, Color and Background Color for alarm messages can be selected.
Example of designing an Alarm History Table
Alarm Setup:
1. Select Application/Alarm Setup.
2. Specify @230 for Address of Alarm Block to and 16 as Number of Alarms.
3. Set the scan time to 1 second for sampling the controller data, and maximum number of records to 100.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
127
Instructions
4. Enter texts in the message block, select to acknowledge the alarm and which screen to display.
The Alarm Setup dialog box
Setting up properties for the Alarm History Table:
5. Frame: Select Recessed_1 and Blue for frame color.
6. Status Display: Check Time and Alarm Number, and select Yellow for color.
128
The Attributes tab of the Alarm History Table
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
7. Note that the properties for Message, ACK and Screen set in the Alarm Setup dialog box will be shown on the Text tab. Select Red for message color and Black for background color.
The Text tab of the Alarm History Table
The operator terminal will read the reference bits in the controller at fixed periods, then convert the data into its corresponding messages in sequence and display them on the screen.
The Alarm History Table, using 16 On/Off Buttons to send alarm messages.
Note that the Alarm State A represents Activate; Alarm State C represents Clear.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
129
Instructions
Active Alarm List
The operator terminal displays only the active alarms according to its reference bit in controller = ON and sorts the data according to the order of the state number.
All the attributes are the same as for the Alarm History Table object, please see the section
Example of designing an Active Alarm List
The steps used to create an Active Alarm List are the same as for an Alarm History
Table object. You must complete the alarm setup first, and then specify its properties.
Example of designing an Alarm History Table
.
The Active Alarm List displays only the active alarms, and in numerical order.
Alarm Frequency Table
The operator terminal summarizes the number of occurrences of each alarm which are to be monitored and displayed on the screen.
All the attributes are the same as for the Alarm History Table object, please see the section
Example of designing an Alarm Frequency Table
The steps used to create an Alarm Frequency Table are the same as for an Alarm His-
tory Table object. You must complete the alarm setup first, and then specify its properties. Please see section
Example of designing an Alarm History Table
130
The Alarm Frequency Table displays the number of occurrences of each alarm
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Alarm Marquee
The operator terminal displays alarm messages from active alarms as a moving sign.
All the attributes are the same as for the Alarm History Table object, please see the section
Example of designing an Alarm Marquee
The steps used to create an Alarm Marquee are the same as for an Alarm History
Table object. You must complete the alarm setup first, and then specify its properties.
Please see section
Example of designing an Alarm History Table
The Alarm Marquee displays the active alarm message as a moving sign on the screen
2.7.20 Sub Macro
A Sub Macro is the macro’s sub-application. The main function is to call commands directly. Some common functions or operation commands which are used frequently can be edited and saved as sub macros for call commands.
There are 512 options for a Sub Macro, please see the chapter
details.
The Sub Macro edit window
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
131
Instructions
2.8 Library Menu
There are five options in the Library menu: Bitmap Library, Font Library, Save as
Shape, Shape Library Manager and Text Pool. The main function is to edit, import and export bitmaps, shapes, fonts or text pools.
2.8.1
Bitmap Library
The Bitmap Library is used mainly to import, export, and edit bitmaps.
Select Library/Bitmap Library, to open the dialog box below:
132
The Bitmap Library dialog box
Graphics: Lists all the graphics available for selection.
View: Displays the selected graphic.
Compilation
Color Dithering: Processes the graphic (16-bit, 24-bit or JPEG) to display the image as vividly as the original on the screen. There are 8-color, 16-color and 256-color options. The higher the color selected, the higher the contrast of the figure displayed.
Import from: Imports bitmaps from a selected library, *.GBF or *.GIF graphics.
Export to: Exports bitmaps to a selected library, *.GBF.
Import: Imports the graphic into the bitmap library from a computer. The importable graphic formats include Bitmap Image (*.BMP), Jpeg Image Files (*.JPG),
AutoCad Files (*.DWG or *.DXF) and GIF Files (*.GIF).
Export: Exports the graphic stored in the bitmap library to a computer.
Rename: Modifies the name of the graphic.
Copy: Copies the selected bitmap to the clipboard.
Paste: Imports a bitmap from the clipboard. When clicked, a dialog box will appear and ask for the name of the imported graphic.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Delete: Deletes the selected bitmap.
Flip and Rotate: Allows changing a bitmap’s orientation. When clicked, a dialog box with flip or rotate degree options is displayed.
The Flip and Rotate dialog box
Inverse Color: Inverts the selected bitmap’s colors.
Stretch: Adjusts the width and height of the bitmap.
The Stretch dialog box
Trim: Allows cutting unused area around a bitmap.
The Trim dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
133
Instructions
2.8.2
Font Library
The Font Library supports all Windows fonts, and enables defining up to 16 types.
You can define your preferred fonts to create a more attractive interface.
User-defined fonts
Select Library/Font Library to display the Font Library dialog box.
The Font Library dialog box
Import from: Click to import fonts into the font library.
Export to: Click to export fonts to the font library.
Modify: Click to modify the format of selected font.
134
Modifying a font in the Font Library
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.8.3
Save as Shape
The Save as Shape command allows the user to save basic objects such as Line, Rect-
angle, Circle, Polygon, Pie, Arc, Scale or multiple shapes as a file in the Library. A shape must be selected before saving it as ashape. Multiple shapes may be selected simultaneously.
Select Library/Save as Shape. You can select the library to save in from the dropdown list and name the shape in the Shape Name block.
The Save as Shape dialog box
2.8.4
Shape Library Manager
The Shape Library Manager is used to manage shapes in the Shape Library.
The Shape Library Manager dialog box
New: Creates a new shape library.
Open: Opens an existing shape library.
Save: Saves the active shape library to a file.
Save As: Allows selection of which file to save to.
Close: Closes the Shape Library Manager. If changes have not been saved, a dialog box will be displayed, asking if you want to save.
Copy: Copies the selected shape to the clipboard.
Paste: Imports the shape from the clipboard.
Cut: Exports the selected shape to the clipboard.
Delete: Deletes the selected shape.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
135
Instructions
Properties: Displays the properties of the selected shape.
136
The Shape Properties dialog box
– View:
All States: Displays all states of the selected shape.
State: Displays individual states of the selected shape.
– Name: Specifies the name of the selected shape.
– Purpose: The function of the selected shape; Push Button or General.
– Original Size: Displays the width and height of the original shape.
– Minimum Size: Specifies the minimum width and height of the selected shape.
– Keep Original Aspect Ratio: Selecting this option keeps the size of the shape in its original ratio.
– Display: Sets the state of the selected graphic; Always or At State.
– User Changeable: Allows changing shape properties, including frame/border color, background color, pattern color, and pattern.
– Profile: Specifies the position of the component object and displays the specified view here.
2.8.5
Text Pool
The function of the Text Pool is mainly to provide common management and editing of the texts used in the application.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Select Library/Text Pool.
The Text Pool dialog box
Perform the following steps to edit texts in the Text Pool:
1. Enter the desired texts in the Text Pool dialog box to save in.
2. Click on the object to edit an object which has texts, as in Text Pool, then select
Edit/State and Text Management.
The State &Text Management dialog box
3. Select Replace By to edit. You can select the desired text which was edited in
Text Pool to display.
The following List object displays the text which was edited in Text Pool.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
137
Instructions
2.9 Application Menu
The Application menu is used for general management of the operator terminal and the software. You can set up configuration parameters for the operator terminal, such as controller type, operator terminal type, logging buffers and alarm setup. In addition, Compile and Download are also available in this menu.
2.9.1
Workstation Setup
Workstation Setup is used to set up the parameters of the operator terminal.
Select Application/Workstation Setup to display the following dialog box.
138
The General tab of the Application Properties dialog box
General Tab
On the General tab, you can set up the operator terminal and controller model, startup language and screen, and control block and status block.
Application Name: The name of the application.
Panel/Workstation: Specifies the model of operator terminal. Note the resolution, size, and color while selecting.
Programming Type: Selects Macro or Standard.
Controller/PLC: Specifies the type of controller the operator terminal will communicate with.
Printer: Specifies the type of printer the operator terminal will print to.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Multi-lingual Support: Check this option to support multi-lingual use and specify the startup language. Supports up to 5 different languages including Arabic, Chinese
Simplified, Chinese Traditional, Cyrillic, English, Greek, Japanese, Korean, Thai,
Turkish and Western European. Please see section
for setup. The
Multi-lingual Support function allows that only one application file for a machine that can support up to 5 languages has to be maintained.
Control Block: Specifies the controller address to control, and size. The minimum size is 2 words, the maximum size is 32 words (the maximum size is 6 for recipe). The control block enables the controller to control actions in the operator terminal such as change screen, print, send recipes etc. Please see the chapter
Status Block: Specifies the starting address for the Status Block; the fixed size is 10 words. The Status Block provides communication between the operator terminal and the controller. The operator terminal will write a continuous block of data.
Please see the chapter
Data Format: Specifies the data format to be read.
Start-up Screen: Specifies the screen to display when the operator terminal starts up.
Connection Tab
On the Connection Tab, you can add or delete devices for connection and set up the parameters such as address, connection method and IP address.
The Connection tab of the Application Properties dialog box; Multi-link is selected
Add: Click to add new devices to connect with, including Muti-link, and select controller type to connect with. For the steps or methods related to setup, please see the chapter
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
Remove: Removes the connected device. The No. 1 device cannot be removed.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
139
Instructions
Rename: Modifies the device name and type, but the device type cannot be modified for the No. 1 device. This change has to be made on the General tab.
HMI:
Address: Sets up the operator terminal. Once the multi-link is made, the address can be repeated and the range is 0~255.
Port/method used for the connection: Specifies the port and method to connect with the controller or other operator terminal models including COM1, COM2,
Ethernet (Cross-link), COM1 (Multi-link slave), COM2 (Multi-link slave) and
Ethernet (Multi-link slave).
Multi-link:
– This HMI is a multi-link master: Check this option to specify the operator as a master.
Master Port: Specifies the port which connects master with slaves; COM1,
COM2 or Ethernet.
Common Register Block: Specifies the starting location for the Common Register
Block (CRB), which master and slaves use.
CRB Size: Specifies the size of Common Register Block.
Common On/Off Block: Specifies the starting location for the Common On/Off
Block (COB).
COB Size: Specifies the size of th Common On/Off Block.
Operator terminals arranged into a multi-link (one master; multi-slave) network is not available for all operator terminal models; please see
Features and Operator Terminal Models
140
Cross-link and connection to Simatic S7-200 (via PPI; 1-to-1) is selected
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
IP Address: Specifies the IP addresses of the other operator terminal. The specified operator terminal connects with the controller through the other operator terminal.
HMI Type: Specifies the model to connect with the controller (other operator terminals).
For the setup of Multi-link and Cross-link, please see the chapter
Note:
The transmission parameters for the operator terminal and the controller must be identical as they are linked together. When the controller model is specified, H-Designer will set it up as the controller default, but you must ensure that this setup is identical in the operator terminal.
For the setup of each controller, please see the relevant controller manual or the chapter
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Miscellaneous Tab
On the Miscellaneous tab, recipe functions and write time and data to the controller can be set up.
The Miscellaneous tab of the Application Properties dialog box
For setup of recipes, please see chapter
The recipe function is not available for all operator terminal models; please see
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
Write time and date to PLC: Select this option to enable the operator terminal to
write time and date to the real time clock in the controller. Please see section
Touch Screen/External Keys: Specifies the format of buffer.
Start up Delay (Sec.): Specifies the length of time before the screen start up.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
141
Instructions
Logging Buffers Tab
Logging Buffers are used to collect data from the battery backup RAM. It is a continuous data block and there are 12 buffers available.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for complete details.
When creating a Historical Display object, the logging buffer’s area and size has to be set up first. Please see section
Password Tab
When you want to copy the screen or upload the application to H-Designer, the operator terminal will ask for the password.
The Password tab of the Application Properties dialog box
2.9.2
Tag Table
The Tag Table enables you to provide a name for the controller address and specify the refresh rate.
Select Application/Tag Table.
142
The Tag Table window
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.9.3
Alarm Setup
To use the Historical Display object, you must set up its address and parameters first.
Then the operator terminal will display the corresponding messages after reading the controller value. Up to 512 messages can be specified.
Select Application/Alarm Setup.
The Alarm Setup dialog box
Address of Alarm Block: To use a bit (LSB) as a corresponding alarm address. If
W130 is the starting position and the number of the alarm is set 160, the operator terminal will monitor 160 bits = 10 words, and this corresponds to W130, W131,
W132……W139. When bit W130 turns on, the operator terminal will sample and record an alarm message.
Number of Alarms: Specifies the number of alarms.
Scan Time: Specifies the sampling time for monitoring the controller data, 1-10 seconds.
Number of Records in Alarm History: Specifies the maximum number of events stored in the alarm buffer. For example, 100 means that when the 101st alarm event occurs, the first alarm message will be overwritten.
Table:
– Message: Enter the text to the alarm message. The format can be modified in its dialog box. Up to 512 alarm messages can be set.
– ACK: Acknowledge the message which has been received to conceal the alarm.
– Screen: Specifies the screen to display when the alarm occurs.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
143
Instructions
2.9.4
Slide-out Menu
The function of the Slide-out Menu is to operate the functional keys, such as the Set
Button, Reset Button and Momentary Button, in a convenient way in the operator terminal. The number of functional keys depends on the selected operator terminal model.
When the Menu button is clicked, the operator terminal will display the slide-out menu with its specified functional keys.
The Slide-out Menu
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for complete details.
Select Application/Slide-out Menu. Click New to display the following dialog:
144
Setup of the Slide-out Menu
Name: Enter the name for the slide-out menu.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Function: Select a function from the drop-down list.
Instructions
Selecting a function for a button on the Slide-out Menu
Cut, Copy, Replace, Clear: Use the buttons to cut, copy, replace and clear the button’s content.
Description: Enter the name for the button in the Text block.
View: Click the View button to view the created slide-out menu.
2.9.5
System Message
The System Message is used to edit messages for the operator terminal system. When the Operator Confirmation option is selected, executing the object will display its system message. For example, the system message Are you sure? can be displayed after the numeric entry.
An example of a System Message
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
145
Instructions
Select Tool/System Messages.
The System Messages edit window
Double-click on the message block; the message can be modified in its dialog box as shown below.
146
Editing System Message
The Save as Default button is to save the system messages as a default file (*.PSM).
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.9.6
Macros
Macros enable the operator terminal to execute a number of tasks including flow control, data transfer, conversion, counter, system service instructions, etc. Using macros can not only help you communicate to the controller but also connect to other devices. This feature provides an efficient integration system as well as an economical structure for hardware application. In addition, using macros can also significantly reduce program size and optimize controller efficiency.
Please see the chapter
There are three macro options in the Application menu; INITIAL Macro, BACK-
GROUND Macro and CLOCK Macro.
INITIAL Macro
When the operator terminal runs the application for the first time (this means the first time the application is executed after power off ), this macro is executed once.
The purpose of INITIAL Macro is data initialization, communication parameters declaration etc.
BACKGROUND Macro
When the operator terminal runs the application, the command will be executed cyclically. A maximum 30 lines of macro commands can be executed at once. Whatever the screen is, the macro commands will be executed. The purposes of the BACK-
GROUND Macro include communication control, data conversion etc.
CLOCK Macro
When the operator terminal runs the application, the entire macro will be executed once every 500 ms. The purpose of the CLOCK Macro is screen control, bit setting, command control, data transfer etc.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
147
Instructions
2.9.7
Compile
The Compile button is used to test the application to see if any errors happen before the application is executed. After correcting the errors, the application can be executed.
Select Application/Compile.
148
The Compile Status dialog box
After clicking OK the Error Message dialog box will be displayed on the screen.
The Error Message dialog box
Double-click the error message to display the incorrect object or macro on the screen.
Alternatively, check Open dialog box automatically, to automatically display the incorrect object.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.9.8
Download Application and Download
Firmware and Application
Download Application is used to download the update application and screen to the operator terminal.
Downloading application
Download Firmware and Application is used to download the firmware and application to the operator terminal. This option has to be selected the first time you download the application.
Downloading firmware and application
If the connected operator terminal is not the same as the model specified in the project, a message box will appear on the screen.
Note:
Remember to execute Compile before downloading.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
149
Instructions
2.9.9
File Protection
File Protection is used to protect the application; you must enter the password to open the application file.
Select Application/File Protection.
Setting a password for file protection
Note:
This password is used to protect the application file from being modified by unauthorized users, and is totally different from the password set on the
provides security against copying and uploading.
2.10 Tool Menu
The Tool menu is used to manage and simulate the application, and to edit recipes.
There are four options in the Tool menu: Cross Reference, Off-line Simulation,
On-line Simulation and View/Edit Recipe.
2.10.1 Cross Reference
The Cross Reference tool helps you identify the screen name, screen number, controller address, tag address or macro-in use quickly.
150
The Cross Reference window
The icons can be used to sort according to screen name, screen number, controller address, tag address or macro-in use. The right-hand table will list its objects and properties. The preview window below will display the selected object. Click on a heading of a column in the table (such as Serial No, Name or PLC Addr) to sort the properties in ascending or descending order.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
Icon Description
Select this icon to sort by screen number.
Select this icon to sort by screen name.
Select this icon to sort by tag name.
Select this icon to sort by controller address in ascending order; click the address to list the object.
Select this icon to sort by Macro-in use objects.
Select this icon to sort by search pattern. This feature is only available when searching controller addresses or tag names.
Set the desired pattern for search. Select by PLC Addr or by Tag Name,
Exact match or Partial match.
Sorting by Tag Name
Sorting by Address; clicking the address displays the object
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
151
Instructions
When searching controller addresses or tag names, the seach pattern can be specified.
If the search pattern is W, and Partial match is selected, the cross reference will display objects with the controller addresses W - W0, W1, W20, W60.
Specifying the search pattern
152
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.10.2 Off-line and On-line Simulation
H-Designer supports two types of simulation; Off-line Simulation and On-line
Simulation. They both offer simulation of the operator terminal in the PC.
Note:
The application must compile before simulation.
Off-line simulation is available with all controllers which H-Designer offers, but online simulation is only available on some controllers.
Off-line Simulation
Off-line Simulation can be used to present results on a PC with the same operation mode as between the operator terminal and the controller.
H-T60 in off-line simulation
Off-line simulation is without communication with the controller, and provides the following benefits:
1. Before purchasing, you can simulate operation and recognize the operator terminal functions sufficiently.
2. Before downloading, you can simulate on the PC to test the application, including screen change, button functions and display etc.
3. Before the completion of the controller program, the operator terminal application can be presented to the customer.
On-line Simulation
H-Designer offers user On-line Simulation for connection between the PC and the controller communication ports. If there is only one RS232C serial port in the PC, the user needs to add an adapter for transferring the signal from RS232C to RS422 or RS485 in order to connect with the RS422 or RS485 port in the controller. Note that the communication time between H-Designer and controller is 60 minutes. If you need to connect again, please close the H-Designer and restart it.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
153
Instructions
2.10.3 View/Edit Recipes
Select Tool/View/Edit Recipes to display the recipe editor window.
The Recipe Editor window
Note that the recipe must upload the file from the operator terminal to a PC and save the file. The data size and total number of of recipes cannot be modified.
The object is not available on all operator terminal models; please see
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for complete details.
For setup procedures, please see section
and chapter
.
Select File/Open to open the selected recipe file. Note that the recipe file is stated as
*.RCP.
Open the recipe files, then select Recipe/Open Recipe.
Enter the recipe number for the recipe.
The recipe is displayed on the screen for you to edit.
154
Editing Recipe #1
The function of the recipe editor is the same as a common edit tool; it includes open, save, print, view the recipe file, and window arrangement.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.11 Options Menu
The Options menu provides options for editing and transmission.
2.11.1 Snap to Grid
If you select Snap to Grid on the edit screen, the edited objects will align to the nearby grid (see section
). This command is convenient for aligning objects.
2.11.2 Display Grid
When selecting this option, the edit screen will display a grid to allow easy alignment.
A screen with a visible grid
2.11.3 Grid Attributes
Select this option to specify the grid size. The bigger the grid size is, the longer the distance between points will be.
2.11.4 Transmission Setup
Select Options/ Transmission Setup to specify the download/upload port and baud rate between the PC and the operator terminal. The PC port options are Ethernet,
COM1…. COM16 and USB. A baud rate of 115200 is recommended.
Note:
These settings are not the same as the ones set on the Connection tab in Application/
Workstation Setup. The former is the setting between the PC and the operator terminal, the latter is the setting between the operator terminal and the controller.
The Transmission Setup dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
155
Instructions
If Ethernet is selected for PC Port, you need to input the PC address or select from the drop-down list.
Selecting Ethernet for PC Port
2.11.5 Default Screen Background Style
Select Options/Default Screen Background Style to specify the pattern, pattern color, and background color for all screens. The default setting will be displayed in all screens except for the special edit screen.
The Default Screen Background Style dialog box
2.11.6 Default Frame Styles
Select Options/Default Frame Styles to specify the different object types with their own shape/frame. Then those objects will be shown as specified on the screen.
156
The Default Frame Styles dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.11.7 Default Text Styles
Select Options/Default Text Styles to specify character size, color and background color for each type of object. The objects will be displayed with their settings on the screen.
The Default Text Styles dialog box
2.11.8 Numeric Keypad Setup
Select Options/Numeric Keypad Setup to set up the numeric keypad on the screen
(displayed for example when clicking the Numeric Entry object).
The Numeric Keypad Setup dialog box
Keypad Size: Small or Large can be selected.
Legend Style: Symbols or Chinese Characters can be selected.
Initial Position: Left or Right can be selected.
2.11.9
Editing Options
Select Options/Editing Options to set up the edit environment here.
The Editing Options dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
157
Instructions
2.12 Window Menu
The Cascade, Tile and Close All options available in the Window menu and all open screens are listed.
Cascade is selected for screen display
158
Tile can be used when copying between screens and for an overview of screens
Close All is used to close all open screens at once; the screens will not be saved. The application is not closed.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Instructions
2.13 Help Menu
The Help menu offers complete details and instructions about Macros and Ladder-
Plus.
Selecting Help/About, displays the version number and copyright information of
H-Designer.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
159
Instructions
160
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
3 Recipes
Recipes include blocks of similar systematic data. Because of the similarities, users can edit them as a group of recipes for convenient transmission. In this way, users can send data efficiently and accurately.
Note:
Recipes are not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
3.1 Example
The following coating equipment is used to spray paint on different parts. The paint colors are limited to white, red, blue, dark, and mixed color (1 = spray, 0 = no spray).
Recipes can be used to present and save data to simplify matters.
Coating Equipment
Color
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
White
1
0
0
0
Red
0
1
1
0
Blue
0
0
1
0
Black
0
0
0
1
Time
3
2
1
1
This recipe data has five variables: White, Red, Blue, Black and Time.
The following recipes are to be created:
Recipe 1 paints the top in white for 3 minutes
Recipe 2 paints the bottom in red for 2 minutes
Recipe 3 paints the left side in purple (red+blue) for 1 minute
Recipe 4 paints the right side in black for 1 minute
A variable represents a word, the recipe size is 5, and the number of recipes is 4.
Recipes
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
161
Recipes
3.2 Recipe Operation Steps
This section will illustrate the operation and application of recipes. We will continue to use the coating equipment from section 3.2 as an example.
1. First, a Recipe Register has to be defined. Select Application/Workstation Setup and enter the PLC address, Recipe size, and Number of recipes on the Miscella-
neous tab.
162
Setting Recipe size = 5 and Number of recipes = 4 in this example
According to the setup above, the starting address of the controller recipe register is
W100 and its size is 5 words. The starting address of the current recipe in the operator terminal is RCPW0 and its size is 5 words. The starting address of the operator terminal RAM is RCPW5 and its size is 5×4 words.
If the recipe write flag is ON, the operator terminal will write the current recipe from
RCPW0-RCPW4 in the operator terminal to W100-W104 in the controller. If the recipe read flag is ON, the operator terminal will write the recipe from controller
W100-W104 to RCPW0-RCPW4 in the operator terminal. If the user wants the operator terminal to read/write the recipe data from/to the controller, RNR (Wn+5) must be defined.
For instructions about operator terminal recipe registers, please see section
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Recipes
2. The application can be edited and saved as a *.V6F file. In the example, a
Numeric Entry object is used to display the coating equipment data in the operator terminal.
RCPW5-RCPW9 represent top recipe data
RCPW10-RCPW14 represent button recipe data
RCPW15-RCPW19 represent left side recipe data
RCPW20-RCPW24 represent right side recipe data
The Coating Equipment screen
3. Download the H-Designer file to the operator terminal. First, select Download
Application in the operator terminal, then select Application/Download Firm-
ware and Application in H-Designer.
4. Then upload the recipe from the operator terminal to H-Designer. Select
Upload Recipes in the operator terminal, and then select File/Upload Recipes in
H-Designer. The recipe will be uploaded to H-Designer and saved as *.RCP.
5. Once the above steps have been completed, the recipe file can be opened to edit.
Select Tool/View/Edit to display the H-Designer Recipe Editor dialog box.
The Recipe Editor dialog box
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
163
Recipes
6. Select File/Open and select the desired recipe file (e.g. painting.RCP).
Note:
The *.RCP recipe files must be uploaded and saved in the operator terminal first; the recipe size and number of recipes cannot be modified
7. To edit the recipe select Recipe/Open and enter the recipe number to open. The coating equipment examples are recipe numbers 1 - 4.
Specifying recipe number
8. The dialog box appears on the screen. The data can be edited in the dialog box.
Note that the count for editable data is contained in data size. After editing, select File/Save to save the data. For example, Recipe 1 is (1,0,0,0,3), Recipe 2 is
(0,1,0,0,2), etc.
164
Editing the recipe data
9. Select Download Recipes in the operator terminal, and then select File/Down-
load Recipes to download the recipe file.
Finally, select Run in the operator terminal. The operator terminal will display the recipe filled with the same data as displayed on the screen in H-Designer. The coating equipment example includes painting methods and time.
Coating Equipment
Color
Top
Bottom
Left
Right
White
1
0
0
0
Red
0
1
1
0
The recipe data in the operator terminal
Blue
0
0
1
0
Black
0
0
0
1
Time
3
2
1
1
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
3.3 Recipe Controlled by Controller
Once the recipe is completed, the controller can be assigned to control the recipe through the communication link between the controller and the operator terminal.
The controller can read/write the recipe from/to the operator terminal. This section will introduce the controller setup and corresponding execution related to the operator terminal. For an introduction to communication between the controller and the
operator terminal, please see the chapter
for complete details.
The main steps to read a recipe from the controller to the operator terminal:
1. Set up two continuous blocks; one is the control block, the other is the status block. Select Application/Workstation Setup in H-Designer, enter the controller address and its size for Control Block and Status Block on the General tab. The control block size must be set to 6 words.
2. Taking the coating equipment as an example, the control block for the NULL controller W0-W5, the size is 6, and the status block is W10-W15.
Recipes
Setting up control block and status block
For the properties not explained in this section, please see the sections
.
The recipe register is defined as in section
is W100 and the size is 5.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
165
Recipes
The following are the words and their names in the controller. The words related to read/write recipes are highlighted with a light blue background. Please see the chapter
Controller Internal Data Block
Control
Block
Word
W0 0 1 2
W1
W2
. . . . .
W3
W4
W5 0 1 2
Status
Block
W10 0 1 2
W11 . . . . .
W12
W13
W14
W15 0 1 2
Recipe
Register
W100
W101
W102
W103
W104
Bit
. . . . .
4 5 6
.
.
.
. . . . .
.
.
.
. . . . .
4 5 6
.
.
.
1
0
0
0
3
.
.
.
. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
13 14 15
. . . . .
13 14 15
13 14 15
. . . . .
13 14 15
Member
SNR
CFR
LBCR#1
LBCR#2
LBCR#3
RNR
SSR
GSR
LBCR#1
LBCR#2
LBCR#3
RIR
1st recipe, 1st word
1st recipe, 2nd word
1st recipe, 3rd word
1st recipe, 4th word
1st recipe, 5th word
CFR bit # 4 is the Recipe Write Flag; bit # 5 is the RCPNO Change Flag; bit # 6 is the Recipe Read Flag.
GSR bit # 4 is the Recipe Write Status; bit # 5 is the RCPNO Change Status; bit # 6 is the Recipe Read Status.
3. Set up RNR to read recipe # N. W5 in the controller is assigned to read recipe #
N from the operator terminal. For example, 1st recipe N = 1.
4. Then set RCPNO Change Flag to ON for about 1 second. The operator terminal’s internal RCPNO and Current Recipe will be changed to read recipe # N.
Remember to set the RCPNO Change Flag to OFF before re-triggering.
Status Block: When the value of RCPNO is changed, the value of RIR (W15) will also be changed. The current recipe # N can be checked on the controller. Moreover, if the RCPNO Change Flag is set to ON, the GSR bit (W11 bit # 5) will also be set to ON. The status bit will turn OFF automatically after RCPNO is changed.
For details on addressing recipe data, please see the chapter
166
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Recipes
Operator Terminal Data Register
.
.
.
.
RCPW20
RCPW21
.
.
RCPW24
.
.
RCPNO
.
.
Word
RCPW0
RCPW1
RCPW2
RCPW3
RCPW4
RCPW5
RCPW6
.
.
RCPW9
RCPW10
RCPW11
.
.
RCPW14
0
1
0
0
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
.
.
0
2
1
0
3
0
0
0
Recipe Data
1
0
0
1
0
0
3
Member
Current Recipe
Recipe # 1
Recipe # 2
.
.
.
.
Recipe # 4
.
.
Specified Recipe # N
.
.
5. Finally, set the Recipe Write Flag to ON. The operator terminal will then write the Current Recipe to the controller. The recipe data will be saved in the designated Recipe Register Block. Remember to set the Recipe Write Flag to OFF before re-triggering. In this example, set W1 bit # 4 to ON for about 1 second.
The operator terminal will then write the Current Recipe to controller W100-
W104.
Status Block: When the operator terminal has written a recipe, the GSR bit (W11 bit # 4) will be set to ON automatically. Likewise, if the Recipe Write Flag is set to
OFF, the GSR bit will also be set to OFF.
Once the steps above have been completed, the controller can read one cycle of a recipe from the operator terminal. Remember to reset the flag to OFF each time in order to trigger the flag.
Follow the steps above to set the RNR, RCPNO Change Flag and Recipe Read Flag values and to read a recipe from the controller to the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
167
Recipes
3.4 Recipe Controlled by Operator
Terminal
Using objects on the operator terminal display makes it convinient to control read and write actions on recipe data, performed in the controller. Please see the chapter
This section uses coating equipment as an example of controlling recipe data in the controller. The following is an illustration of the coating equipment setup on the operator terminal.
An illustration of a coating equipment screen in the operator terminal
Object Design steps:
1. Design an object for the user to enter as recipe N and write recipe N to controller RNR.
In H-Designer, select Object/Numeric Entry and enter the address of RNR in the Write box.
Using the coating equipment as an example, the address of RNR is W5; so the controller recipe N will write to W5. It is also possible to enter RCPNO directly into a Numeric Entry object. This can only be changed locally in the operator terminal.
168
Settting up the address to write recipe N to controller RCPNO
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Recipes
2. Design an object that can confirm the designated recipe and write the commands to controller CFR bit # 5 RCPNO Change Flag; set the flag to ON.
In H-Designer, select Object/Push Button/Set Constant. First, enter the address of CFR in the Write box. Then enter the constant value in the Value box to set its register bit.
Using the coating equipment as an example, the address of CFR is W1. The
RCPNO Change Flag is located in CFR bit # 5.
The constant is set to 32 (2
5
= 32), so the RCPNO Change Flag will be set to
ON.
Setting RCPNO Change Flag to ON
3. Finally, design an object which can set the CFR bit # 4 Recipe Write Flag to ON and write the Current Recipe to the controller.
Using the coating equipment as an example, the address of CFR is W1.
The Recipe Write Flag is located in CFR bit # 4, so enter the value 16 (2
4
= 16).
The Recipe Write Flag located in W1 bit # 4 will then be set to ON.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
169
Recipes
Setting up Recipe Write Flag ON
4. If the user wants to read a recipe from the controller to the operator terminal, the
Recipe Read Flag located in CFR bit # 6 must be set to ON.
Using the coating equipment as an example, the address of CFR is W1.
The Recipe Flag is located in CFR bit # 6 (2
6
= 64).
170
Setting up Recipe Read Flag ON
Once the above object design steps are completed, the user can execute the actions in the operator terminal conveniently.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
4 Control and Status Block
This chapter describes the general information that you need for programming the controller to communicate with the operator terminal. Detailed information about connecting specific controllers to the operator terminal is presented.
To set up the Control Block Address, Size and Status Block Address, select
Application/Workstation Setup.
Setting up control and status block parameters
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
171
172
Control and Status Block
4.1 Control Block
The Control Block is a block of continuos registers in the controller. The most important function in the operator terminal is the control block.
The control block enables the controller to control actions in the operator terminal through the controller program. The minimum number of words used in the control block is 2. The maximum number of words used is 32. The size of the control block varies according to the functionality required (if recipe functionality is used, then the minimum length is 6 words). The members of the Control Block are shown in the following table:
Word #
Wn
Wn+1
Wn+2
Wn+3
Wn+4
Wn+5
Wn+6 and above
Member Example: S7-200 Example: FX2
Screen Number Register (SNR) VW0
Command Flag Register (CFR) VW2
Logging Buffer Control Register #1 VW4
Logging Buffer Control Register #2 VW6
Logging Buffer Control Register #3 VW8
RCPNO Number Register (RNR)
General User Area Register (GUAR)
User’s application registers CBn, n must not exceed 31.
VW10
VW12=cb6
VW14=cb7
...
VW18=cb9
...
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6=cb6
D7=cb7
...
D9=cb9
...
Say, for example, that the starting address is W0 (the starting address can be specified; the members in the above table will shift according to the starting address). Size 10 means that the operator terminal can read data from the W0-W9 (10 words) controller registers and store data in the CB0-CB9 internal control block.
The functions of the words Wn through Wn+m (word n+m) in the control block will be discussed in the following sections.
4.1.1
Screen Number Register
A controller can request a operator terminal to display a specific screen by setting its
Screen Number Register (SNR) to the number of that screen.
SNR (Wn) enables the controller to control the operator terminal screen or print the screen. For example, a controller can request a operator terminal to display a specific screen by setting its SNR to the number of that screen.
The operator terminal cannot reset the SNR (Wn) to 0 automatically. However, the operator terminal does reset the SNR (Wn) to zero before changing a screen. If the screen specified by the SNR does not exist, the operator terminal does nothing but resetting the SNR (Wn=0).
The value in the SNR can be BCD or binary.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
Example
The value of the SNR data register (Wn) and the functions (bit 0-bit 05) are as follows:
Wn 16-bit #(00-15) Function
Bit 9-..bit 0
Bit 10
The first 10 bits store the screen number to be changed to.
Reserved
Bit 13=off, 12=off, 11=off No language was selected
Bit 13=off, 12=off, 11=on Language 1
Bit 13=off, 12=on, 11=off Language 2
Bit 13=off, 12=on, 11=on Language 3
Bit 13=on, 12=off, 11=off Language 4
Bit 13=on, 12=off, 11=on Language 5
Bit 13=on, 12=on, 11=off Reserved
Bit 13=on, 12=on, 11=on Reserved
Bit 14
Bit 15
Backlight turned off when set to 1
Backlight turned on when set to 1
The register (bit 0-9) is used to control the screen change and the other bits (bit 10-
15) are not related. In other words, it is not necessary to control the backlight or language when changing the screen. Likewise, it is not necessary to assign the screen number when setting up the backlight or selecting a language.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
173
Control and Status Block
4.1.2
Command Flag Register
The functions of the bits in the CFR are summarized in the following table:
Wn+1 16-bit
#(00-15)
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
Bit 0
1
Function
Alarm History Buffer Clear Flag
Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Flag
Print Change Paper Flag/Form Feed Flag
Hardcopy Flag
Recipe Write Flag - Data sent from operator terminal to controller
RCPNO Change Flag
Recipe Read Flag - Data sent from controller to operator terminal
Buzzer action control
Clear Flag #1
Clear Flag #2
Clear Flag #3
Clear Flag #4
Trigger Flag #1
Trigger Flag #2
Trigger Flag #3
Trigger Flag #4
The bits of the CFR (Wn+1) are described in more detail below.
Bit 0: Alarm History Buffer Clear Flag
This controller bit is used to clear the data in the alarm history buffer.
If bit 1 is set to clear the data in the alarm history buffer, the operator terminal will clear its data when bit 0 is set to 1.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to clear the data and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection. The “handshake” function can be used to reset the bit as well. For more about the “handshake” function, please see the section
Bit 1: Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Flag
This controller bit is used to clear the Alarm Frequency Buffer.
If bit 1 represents to clear the data of alarm frequency buffer, the operator terminal will clear its data when bit 0 sets to bit 1.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to clear the data and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection. The “handshake” function can be used to reset the bit as well. For more about the “handshake” function, please see the section
Bit 2: Print Change Paper Flag
This controller bit is used to control form feed on the printer connected to the operator terminal.
Set the bit ON, and the printer will change paper.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to form feed and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
174
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
Bit 3: Hard Copy Flag
This controller bit is used to control the hard copy function for the printer connected to the operator terminal.
Set the bit to ON and the printer will print the current screen.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to print a hard copy and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
Bit 4: Recipe Write Flag - from operator terminal to controller
This bit is used to write the recipe from RAM to the controller. This is only supported by operator terminals with a recipe function.
Set the RNR (Wn+5) to write the recipe, set the bit to ON, and the recipe will be written to the controller.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to write another recipe and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
Bit 5: RCPNO Change Flag
This controller bit is used to change the content value of RCPNO. RCPNO is an internal operator terminal register used to control the recipe data. This is only supported by operator terminals with a recipe function.
Set the RNR (Wn+5) to write the recipe, set the bit to ON, RCPNO can be modified.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to modify RCPNO and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
Bit 6: Recipe Read Flag - from controller to operator terminal
This controller bit is used to read the recipe data from the controller to the operator terminal and save it in the RAM block.
Set the RNR (Dn+5) to the recipe number to be updated. Then set the bit to ON and the operator terminal will update the corresponding recipe.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to update and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
175
Control and Status Block
Bit 7: Buzzer Flag
This controller bit is used to control the operator terminal’s buzzer.
Set the bit to ON (about 1 sec.) to start the buzzer.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to start the buzzer.
Bit 8-11: Clear Flag #1 - #4
This controller bit is used to clear curves in the operator terminal. There are four clear flags, and the user can set the corresponding signal to clear the desired curve.
Set the bit to ON/OFF once to clear the values of a trend graph or X-Y chart.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to modify RCPNO and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
Bit 12-15: Trigger Flag #1 - #4
This controller bit is used to sample the trend graph data. There are four trigger flags in all.
Once the controller bit is set to ON/OFF, the operator terminal will read the continuous data and covert it into a continuous curve which is displayed as a trend graph or X-Y chart objects.
The controller requires that the bit be reset if the operator terminal is re-assigned to sample the data and it needs enough time for operator terminal detection.
4.1.3
Logging Buffer Control Registers: LBCRs
The other type of trend graph in the operator terminal is called the Historical Trend
Graph. The operator terminal reads the data from the corresponding logging buffer according to the specific signal. The logging buffer is used to save the sample data in battery backup RAM. Remember to specify the logging buffer to read from and its size.
In LBCRs, Trigger Bits are used to request logging buffers to sample the data from controllers. Clear Bits are used to clear logging buffers and Size Bits are used to determine the size of the data to be read. Consequently, users can use the LBCRs to clear logging buffers or to request logging buffers to sample the data from the controllers.
176
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
There are twelve logging buffers here, and operator terminals can be set to sample the data automatically at fixed periods, or to sample or clear the historical trend graph controlled by the controllers.
Setting up logging buffers
Note that LBCR1 controls logging buffer #1 through #4. LBCR2 controls logging buffer #5 through #8. LBCR3 controls logging buffer #9 through #12.
The positions of the trigger bit, clear bit and size bit for each logging buffer are shown in the following table:
Bit #
VW4
LBCR1
Bit #
VW6
LBCR2
Bit #
VW8
LBCR3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 SB4 CB4 TB4 0
8 7
SB3 CB3 TB3 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 SB8 CB8 TB8 0
8 7
SB7 CB7 TB7 0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 SB12 CB12 TB12 0
8 7
SB11 CB11 TB11 0
SB: Size Bit; CB: Clear Bit; TB: Trigger Bit:
6 5 4 3
SB2 CB2 TB2 0
2 1 0
SB1 CB1 TB1
6 5 4 3
SB6 CB6 TB6 0
2 1 0
SB5 CB5 TB5
6 5 4 3
SB10 CB10 TB10 0
2 1 0
SB9 CB9 TB9
LBCR1 Buffer #4
LBCR2 Buffer #8
LBCR3 Buffer #12
Buffer #3
Buffer #7
Buffer #11
Buffer #2
Buffer #6
Buffer #10
Buffer #1
Buffer #5
Buffer #9
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
177
Control and Status Block
Trigger Bit #1- #12: Sampling Control
The operator terminal can not only sample the historical trend graph at a particular time interval, it can also sample the historical trend graph under the control of the trigger bit in the controller. When the trigger bit (TB #1 - TB #12) is set to ON/OFF
(about 1 sec.), the operator terminal will execute its sampling function.
Remember to set to OFF before re-triggering.
Clear Bit #1- #12: Clear Control
By triggering the trend graph clear bit (CB #1 - CB #12) ON/OFF once (about 1 sec.), the trend graph can be erased. The flag needs to be set to OFF if it is to be triggered again.
Size Bit #1-#12: Multiple Sampling Control
By triggering the size bit (SB #1 - SB #12) to ON, the operator terminal can sample single or multiple data values. When the trigger bit (TB #1 - TB #12) is set to ON/
OFF (about 1 sec.), the operator terminal will execute its sampling function.
Logging Buffer
In setting up the logging buffer, the first step is to specify the Source Address, which is used to specify the controller address to read the data from.
After setting up the source address, the size bit is set to OFF and the trigger bit is changed from 0 to 1. Then the logging buffer will read a data value from the controller.
To force the logging buffer to read multiple data values from the controller, the size of the source address to read from must be set. Then set the size bit to ON and change the trigger bit from 0 to 1. Note that the size cannot exceed 1,022 words.
Change the clear bit from 0 to 1 to clear the logging buffer.
To force logging buffer recording, the controller must reset the trigger and clear bits.
Sufficient time must be provided for operator terminal detection
Example: FX2 controller
Assumptions:
1. Control block starts from D0 with a size = 6
2. Source address of logging buffer #11 is D200
3. The record size of logging buffer #11 is 3 words
To request logging buffer #11 to read only one data record from the controller, first write the data to be read in D200-D202. Set D4’s size bit (10) to OFF and change its trigger bit (8) from 0 to 1. The operator terminal reads D200-D202 into logging buffer #11 after it detects the trigger bit (8) of LBCR3 has changed from 0 to 1.
To request logging buffer #11 to read 50 data records from the controller, set D200 to 150 (=50 x 3). Write the data to be read in D201-D350. Set D4’s size bit (10) to
ON and change its trigger bit (8) from 0 to 1. The operator terminal first reads
D200-D202 to get the actual size of the data to be read after it detects the trigger bit
(8) of LBCR3 has changed from 0 to 1. Then the operator terminal reads D200-
D350 and stores the data in battery backup RAM.
To request logging buffer #11 to clear the data records, change D4’s clear bit from 0 to 1.
178
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
4.1.4
RCPNO Number Register: RNR
RCPNO is an internal register of the operator terminal that specifies the current recipe number. To change the RCPNO, the controller first sets the RNR to the recipe number and then sets the RCPNO write flag or recipe read flag.
To change RCPNO by the controller, the controller has to set RNR to the recipe number and set the RCPNO change flag, which is the CFR 5 bit. If the RNR is zero or greater than the maximum recipe number, the operator terminal will ignore the request.
To request the operator terminal to change RCPNO, the controller must reset the
RCPNO change flag, or use the RCPNO change status flag, which is the GSR 5 bit.
Be sure to set this flag long enough for the operator terminal to detect it.
4.1.5
General User Area Register
For high-speed display, the operator terminal only reads data from the internal register (cannot write to it) when editing in H-Designer. (The maximum size is 32; the size depends on the length of the control block). The format is shown in the following table:
Format
CB n
CBn b
Description
n represents the word data of the nth register, where n is a decimal number; n > 0 but smaller than the specified size.
n.b represents the bit data corresponding to the nth word register, where b is in hexadecimal nth b = 0-f.
For example, if the address of the control block is D0, the Numeric Display object can be selected to display the recipe number register by configuring it to display CB5 instead of displaying D5.
The internal buffer of the control block is read-only. This means, for example, that you can configure a Numeric Display object to show the value of CB2, but you cannot configure the object to allow the operator to change the value of CB2.
Say, for example, that the you want to achieve the effect of the RNR numeric display object using H-Designer. You can specify that D5 be read from (writeable) or that
CB5 be read from (non-writeable).
4.1.6
Determine the Control Block Size
As every application needs a Screen Number Register (SNR) and a Control Flag
Register (CFR), you can refer to the following rules to determine the size of the control block:
1. If the operator terminal reads/writes a recipe from/to a controller, the minimum size is six.
2. If Item 1. is not true and the operator terminal uses LBCR3 to control logging buffer #9 - 12, the minimum size is five.
3. If either Item 1. or Item 2. is not true and the operator terminal uses LBCR2 to control logging buffer #5-8, the minimum size is four.
4. If none of Item 1. through Item 3. is true and the operator terminal uses LBCR1 to control logging buffer #1-4, the minimum size is three.
5. If none of the above is true, the minimum size is two.
6. The size of the control block is the minimum size plus the size of the user area.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
179
180
Control and Status Block
4.2 Status Block
The Status Block is a block of contiguous registers in your controller that display status information from the operator terminal. For example, you can get the cur-rent screen number from the first word of the Status Block. The members of Status Block are shown in the following table:
Word # Member Example: S7-200 Example: FX2
Wn Screen Status Register (SNR) VW20
Wn+1 General Status Register (GSR) VW22
Wn+2 Logging Buffer Status Register #1 (LBSR1) VW24
Wn+3 Logging Buffer Status Register #2 (LBSR2) VW26
Wn+4 Logging Buffer Status Register #3 (LBSR3) VW28
Wn+5 RCPNO Image Register (RIR)
Wn+6 Reserved
VW30
VW32
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
For example, if the status block is W10 and the size is 6 words, the operator terminal will write the status data of the current screen to W10-W15.
4.2.1
Screen Status Register
When a screen is changed in the operator terminal, the controller sets its Screen Sta-
tus Register (SSR) to the number of the new screen. Consequently, the controller can identify the current screen by reading the SSR.
The value of the SSR can be in BCD or binary format.
4.2.2
General Status Register
The components of the General Status Register (GSR) are shown in the following table (bit 0 - bit 15):
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
Bit 0
1
Wn11 16-bit #(00-15)
Bit 0
1
Function
Password Level Status
(not available for applications configured to monitor alarms)
Password Level Status
(not available for applications configured to monitor alarms)
Alarm History Buffer Clear Status
Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Status
Form Feed Status
Hardcopy Status
Recipe Write Status
RCPNO Change Status
Recipe Read Status
Battery Status
Clear Status Flag #1
Clear Status Flag #2
Clear Status Flag #3
Clear Status Flag #4
Trigger Status Flag #1
Trigger Status Flag #2
Trigger Status Flag #3
Trigger Status Flag #4
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
Bit 0, 1: Password Level Status
(not available for applications configured to monitor alarms)
Once connected to the operator terminal, the password level status bit 0 - bit 3 represent the current user level.
Level 0 ==>Bit 0 = off, Bit 1 = off
Level 1 ==>Bit 0 = on, Bit 1 = off
Level 2 ==>Bit 0 = off, Bit 1 = on
Level 3 ==>Bit 0 = on, Bit 1 = on
Level 4 - 9 ==>Bit 0 = on, Bit 1 = on
Bit 0: Alarm History Buffer Clear Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it detects the alarm history buffer clear flag being turned ON. When the operator terminal finishes clearing the alarm history buffer, it will turn OFF this status bit.
Bit 1: Alarm Frequency Buffer Clear Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it detects the alarm frequency buffer clear flag being turned ON. When the operator terminal finishes clearing the alarm fre-quency buffer, it will turn OFF this status bit.
Bit 2: Form Feed Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it detects the form feed flag being turned ON. When the operator terminal finishes sending the form feed character to a printer, it will turn OFF this status bit.
Bit 3: Hardcopy Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it detects the hardcopy flag being turned ON. When the operator terminal finishes printing the current screen, it will turn OFF this status bit.
Bit 4: Recipe Write Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it finishes sending a recipe from the operator terminal’s RAM block to the controller. The operator terminal will turn OFF this status bit when it detects the recipe write flag being turned OFF. This bit can be used as a handshake signal to switch the recipe write flag.
Note:
This function is only supported by operator terminals with a recipe function.
Bit 5: RCPNO Change Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it detects the RCPNO change flag being turned ON. When the operator terminal finishes changing the
RCPNO, it will turn OFF this status bit.
Bit 6: Recipe Read Status
The operator terminal will turn ON this status bit when it finishes reading a recipe from the controller. The operator terminal will turn OFF this status bit when it detects the recipe read flag being turned OFF. One can use this bit as a handshake signal to switch the recipe read flag..
Note:
This function is only supported by operator terminals with a recipe function.
Bit 7: Battery Status
The operator terminal will turn ON the battery status bit if it detects a low battery before running an application.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
181
Control and Status Block
Bit 8-11: Clear Status Flag #1 - #4
The operator terminal will turn ON one of the clear status bits when it finishes the clearing task requested by the corresponding clear flag controlled by the controller.
The operator terminal will turn OFF the same status bit when it detects the corresponding clear flag being turned OFF. One can use clear status bits as handshake signals to switch the clear flags.
Bit 12-15: Trigger Status Flag #1 - #4
The operator terminal will turn ON one of the trigger status bits when it finishes the task triggered by the corresponding trigger flag. The operator terminal will turn OFF the same status bit as it detects the corresponding trigger flag being turned OFF. One can use trigger status bits as handshake signals to switch the trigger flags.
4.2.3
Logging Buffer Status Registers (LBSRs)
LBSR1 saves the status of logging buffer #1 - #4. LBSR2 saves the status of logging buffer # 5 - #8. LBSR3 saves the status of logging buffer #9 - #12.
The status bit’s position for each of the logging buffers is shown in the table below:
Bit #
VW4
LBSR1
Bit #
VW6
LBSR2
Bit #
VW8
LBSR3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB4 FB4 CB4 TB4 FB3 AB3 CB3 TB3 AB2 FB2 CB2 TB2 AB1 FB1 CB1 TB1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB8 FB8 CB8 TB8 AB7 FB7 CB7 TB7 AB6 FB6 CB6 TB6 AB5 FB5 CB5 TB5
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
AB12 FB12 CB12 TB12 AB11 FB11 CB11 TB11 AB10 FB10 CB10 TB10 AB9 FB9 CB9 TB9
AB: Almost Full Bit - indicates that the buffer is 90% or more full.
FB: Full Bit - indicates that the buffer is full.
CB: Clear Status Bit indicates the clear command was received.
TB: Trigger Status Bit indicates the trigger command was received.
LBSR1 Buffer #4
LBSR2 Buffer #8
LBSR3 Buffer #12
Buffer #3
Buffer #7
Buffer #11
Buffer #2
Buffer #6
Buffer #10
Buffer #1
Buffer #5
Buffer #9
The operator terminal will turn ON one of the trigger status bits when it finishes collecting one data record for the logging buffer. The operator terminal will turn OFF the same status bit as it detects the corresponding trigger flag being turned OFF. One can use the trigger status bits as handshake signals to switch the trigger flag.
4.2.4
RCPNO Image Register
The operator terminal sets the RCPNO Image Register (RIR) to the new value of the
RCPNO as this internal register is changed by the user or a controller. Consequently, the controller is able to identify the current value of the RCPNO. The operator terminal reports the value of the RCPNO to the controller by writing the value to the
RCPNO Image Register. The RCPNO Image Register is word #5 of the status block and one can keep track of the current recipe with this register.
182
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
4.3 Recipe Register Block
The recipe block is located in the controller register. To make the operator terminal read/write the recipe data from/to the controller, a recipe block needs to be defined for the application. Please see the chapter
The maximum recipe memory block is 524,288 16-bit (word) for the operator terminal with recipe function. For the applied operator terminal models, please see
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
4.3.1
Recipe Register Number - Enhanced
Operator Terminals
H-Designer provides internal recipe register number for use in the operator terminal application using the formats shown below:
Format Description
RCPNO Recipe Register Number (1-N)
RCPNO is an internal register of the operator terminal that specifies the current recipe number; No>1.
RCPWnnnnn Recipe Register
#nnnnn is current recipe where nnnnn is a decimal number and n>0.
RCPWnnnnn.b
Recipe Register Bit nnnnn is decimal number, n>0; b is a hexadecimal number, b=0-F.
RCPNO is an internal register of the operator terminal used to display the specified recipe on the screen. The operator terminal changes the RCPNO number to display its corresponding recipe data.
There are two methods to change the RCPNO number:
One way is for the user to change the RCPNO number directly through the numeric entry object.
The other way is for the controller to change the RCPNO constant. To change the
RCPNO constant, the user must write the specified number N to RCPNO number register Dn+5, then set the RCPNO change flag Dn+1 bit 5 as ON (about 1 sec.).
The operator terminal will change the RCPNO constant to N and display the recipe data RCPW0 - RCPWm corresponding to the Nth recipe.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
183
Control and Status Block
4.3.2
Addressing Recipe Data - Enhanced
Operator Terminals
Suppose that the number of recipe N=20, a recipe size m=100 words.
To edit an address, one needs to set up the current recipe N =RCPNO. The operator terminal will display the corresponding recipe data.
1. Enter the recipe number N in RCPNO or change RCPNO using the controller.
The operator terminal will display the corresponding recipe data.
For example, if RCONO N=5, RCPW0-RCPW99 displays the data corresponding to the fifth recipe; if RCPNO N=7, RCPW0-RCPW99 displays the data corresponding to the seventh recipe.
2. Another way to edit the corresponding recipe register data is to use the absolute address.
Suppose that an address is greater than RCPW100, the corresponding recipe address will display the Nth recipe data.
RCPW100-RCPW199 represents the first recipe data.
.
RCPW200-RCPW299 represents the second recipe data.
.
RCPW2000-RCPW2099 represents the twentieth recipe data.
Addresses greater than RCPW2099 are invalid.
So, RCP234 represents the second recipe data, 35 words and RPCW 34 in
RCPNO = 2.
184
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Control and Status Block
4.4 Time Block
4.4.1
The Operator Terminal Writes to the
Controller
To make the operator terminal write the current time and date to the controller, the
Time Block has to be defined for the application. The time block is a block of three words in the controller and its format is BCD. The operator terminal updates the time block every minute with the time data. The format of time block is shown in the following:
Low byte of word 0 (07-00)
High byte of word 0 (15-08)
Low byte of word 1 (07-00)
High byte of word 1 (15-08)
Low byte of word 2 (07-00)
High byte of word 2 (15-08)
Minute BCD 00-59
Hour BCD 00-23
Day BCD 00-31
Month BCD 01-12
00-99
Day of week
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
The steps to set up the time block follow. Select Application/Workstation Setup in
H-Designer and you can set up the time block on the Miscellaneous tab. The starting address is W240 and the size is 3 words, so the data will be saved in the W240,
W241, and W242 16-bit registers. The operator terminal updates the time block every minute with the time data.
Seting up the Time Block
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
185
Control and Status Block
4.4.2
The Controller Writes to the Operator
Terminal
The operator terminal can read time and date from the internal real time clock of the controller. Then the operator terminal can modify the corresponding data for the time/date/week read from the real time clock and display the content in the operator terminal. The operator terminal updates the time block every minute with the time data.
4.5 Read Cycle
The operator terminal does the following steps to accomplish one read cycle and it will repeat these steps continuously. The user needs to know this read cycle in order to configure an operator terminal to communicate with the controller efficiently.
Steps of the cycle:
1. Reads control block of the controller.
2. Reads specified register blocks for the current screen.
3. Reads specified On/Off blocks for the current screen.
4. Reads specified alarm register regularly (3-10 sec.).
5. Reads a number of controller locations which: (1) are shown on the current screen; and (2) do not appear in the current screen’s register blocks or On/Off blocks and have not been read recently.
The number of controller locations to be read in this step is specified by the
“number of individual reads” per read cycle of the current screen.
This read cycle is repeated continuously from Step 1. to Step 5.
186
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
5 Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
The Multi-Link function provides an economical and convenient way to link several operator terminals and communicate with a single controller connection port. One operator terminal is master and the others are slaves. The master is the only operator terminal that is physically connected to a controller and this operator terminal is responsible for data exchange between the controller and the slaves. Each of the slave operator terminals must be assigned a unique address so that the master operator terminal is able to identify which slave to send the data to.
The following illustration shows the setup for four operator terminals with one controller. Note that the RS485 cable must be used for the connection between the master and the slaves and each of the slaves must be assigned a unique address.
A Multi-Link network
The cable and the connection between the master and the controller is the same as for the normal 1-to-1 application. The RS485 cable must be used for the connection between the master and the slaves. Additionally, each of the slaves must be assigned a unique address. All the controller models in H-Designer support this function.
Multi-link can also be connected through Ethernet. Please see the chapter
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
187
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
5.1 Communication Parameters
Perform the steps to set up the communication parameters.
Setting up the master
The master is the operator terminal that communicates with the controller.
1. Select Application/Workstation Setup and check the This HMI is a multi-link
master box.
Setting up the multi-link master
2. Download the edited application to the master operator terminal.
188
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
Setting up the slaves
The slave operator terminals do not communicate with the controller
3. Select Application/Workstation Setup. On the Connection tab, select COM1 port for the connection.
4. Setting up the Default Address:
If the slave operator terminal dip switch #5 is set to OFF, the operator terminal will read the communication parameters from H-Designer. The unique address
(2-10) must be entered in Default Address.
Setting up slave operator terminal parameters
Remember to compile and download applications each time after making any changes to the address.
If the slave operator terminal dip switch #5 is set to ON, the operator terminal will read the parameters from the hardware. The user must enter the address (1-
15) in HMI Node Address.
5. Download the edited application to the slave operator terminals.
Please note that the address number of the master operator terminal will not affect communication with the slave operator terminals. Moreover, it is not necessary to set up the baud rate or data type for the slave operator terminals. The purpose of setting up the slave operator terminals is to make sure the connection port for the master operator terminal is correctly set.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
189
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
5.2 Communication Efficiency
H-Designer allows you to specify a Common Register Block (CRB) and a Common
On/Off Block (COB) for the operator terminals. Select Limit data access to Multi-
link Common Blocks only.
190
The CRB is a block of registers and the COB is a block of On/Off locations in the controller. In every read cycle, the master operator terminal reads the data from both the CRB and the COB. Then the master sends the CRB and COB data to all the slaves.
The CRB and the COB allows a maximum of 128 words and 256 words respectively.
In multi-link, the CRB and the COB has to be specified with the same size and format for each of the operator terminals. The slaves are not requested to read the data from the CRB or the COB directly. The slaves read the data from the buffer containing the data sent by the master. The CRB and the COB play important roles in terms of communication efficiency since they can reduce traffic in the multi-link as well as in the link between the master and the controller
For instance, arranging control blocks for the operator terminal in the CRB and the
COB is one of the most effective ways to improve performance. Arranging the variables common to some of the operator terminals in the CRB or the COB will also improve performance. Doing so will result in a high refresh rate for the variables held in the CRB and the COB since the variables are refreshed every read cycle.
In addition to the CRB and the COB, remember to make use of the register blocks and on/off blocks for screens, since these too lessen the burden of the operator terminal by reducing the number of read commands.
It is recommended to specify the CRB and the COB with continuous locations when designing screens.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
5.3 Important Notes
When using multi-link, please note the following points:
1. The RS485 connection method is suggested for the multi-link. The RS232 connection method is suggested for a single slave operator terminal.
2. Each slave must have its own unique address.
3. The operator terminals on the same multi-link must have the same CRB and
COB.
4. The master operator terminal should only start after all the slaves have displayed their first screens. To delay the start-up of the master, select the Miscellaneous tab in the Application Properties dialog box. Then set the time for the Start Up
Delay.
Setting up delay of start-up
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
191
Multi-Link: Normal Connection Port
192
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Ethernet Communication
6 Ethernet Communication
The following chapter will introduce communication setup, application upload/ download and Ethernet communication with Ethernet-enabled controllers and operator terminals. There are two methods for Ethernet-enabled operator terminals to communicate with multi-operator terminal/controllers over Ethernet; multi-link and cross-link.
Note:
Ethernet communication is not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
6.1 Connection
There are two methods to set up the link; using a RJ45 straight through cable or using a RJ45 crossover cable. The RJ45 crossover cable requires a HUB for connection.
The choice between these two methods depends on one’s needs and available equipment. The following table describes differences between thestwo methods.
RJ45 crossover cable
Requires no HUB; links to operator terminal directly
1-to-1 only
RJ45 straight through cable
HUB required
Multi-link
6.2 IP Address Setup
To read or send data from a operator terminal over Ethernet, correct IP addresses have to be set up.
The IP address can be set under Configure in the operator terminal system menu.
Configuration table of operator terminal with support for networking
Note:
If uploading/downloading over Ethernet, the first three segments of the PC IP address must be the same as the first three segments of the operator terminal IP address.
Example: PC IP address=192.168.1.10 and operator terminal IP address=192.168.1.XXX.
The IP address of the operator terminal should not be shared with other units in the network.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
193
Ethernet Communication
6.3 Application Upload/Download over
Ethernet
The Ethernet-enabled operator terminals together with H-Designer provide upload/ download over Ethernet for application, firmware, recipes and source code.
Uploading/downloading over Ethernet
Preform the following steps to upload/download an H-Designer application over
Ethernet:
1. Set the IP address, gateway address etc in the Configuration Table. Please see the section
2. In H-Designer, select Options/Transmission Setup and select Ethernet from the
PC Port list.
Selecting PC Port
3. Enter the address under IP Address or select from the drop-down list.
194
Setting the IP address
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Ethernet Communication
4. Select Application/Download Application or Download Firmware and Appli-
cation to download the application.
Follow the same steps to Upload Application, Upload Recipes, Download Recipes or Reconstruct Source over Ethernet. For Upload Application, the steps above must be changed to select File/Upload Application.
If the link is not set up properly, H-Designer will display an error message.
Communication error message
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
195
Ethernet Communication
6.4 Communication with Ethernetenabled controllers
H-Designer supports operator terminals communicating with Ethernet-enabled controllers using Modbus TCP/IP. Consequently, the operator terminal can control or read data from the controllers.
Connection to Ethernet-enabled controllers
Perform the following steps to set up the connection:
1. Select Application/Workstation Setup. On the General tab, select the type of controller or Modbus TCP/IP Device from the Controller/PLC list.
2. On the Connection tab, select Ethernet for Port/method used for the connec-
tion. Enter the address in the Default Address and IP Address boxes.
196
Selecting communication method and setting the IP address
3. Download the H-Designer application file to the operator terminal and set up the link to connect.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Ethernet Communication
6.5 Multi-Link - One Master and Multiple
Slaves
The Multi-Link over Ethernet function allows linking several operator terminals (one master and multiple slaves). This speeds up communication between the operator terminals.
Multi-Link over Ethernet
Perform the following steps to set up the communication:
Setting up the master
The master is the operator terminal that communicates with the controller.
1. Select Application/Workstation Setup. On the General tab, select the operator terminal model from the Panel/Workstation list and the type of controller from the Controller/PLC list.
Selecting operator terminal model and controller model
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
197
Ethernet Communication
2. On the Connection tab, check the This HMI is a multi-link master box and select Ethernet from the Master Port list. Next, check Limit data access to
Multi-link Common Blocks only.
Setting up the multi-link master
3. Download the edited application to the master operator terminal.
Setting up the slaves
The slave operator terminals do not communicate with the controller
4. Select Application/Workstation Setup. On the Connection tab, select Ethernet
(Multi-link slave) port for the connection.
198
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Ethernet Communication
5. Set up Master IP Address, Common Register Block, Common On/Off Block,
CRB Size and COB Size.
Setting up connection method, master IP address etc.
6. Download the edited application to the slave operator terminals.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
199
Ethernet Communication
6.6 Cross-Link over Ethernet
(Data Sharing)
The Cross-Link over Ethernet function allows users to link several operator terminals and controllers and share data between them.
Cross-Link over Ethernet function
The following steps are performed to set up the connection:
Setup in the first operator terminal
1. Select Application/Workstation Setup. On the General tab, select the operator terminal model from the Panel/Workstation list and the controller type from the
Controller/PLC list. .
200
Selecting operator terminal model and controller model
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Ethernet Communication
2. On the Connection tab, click Add to add Connection 2 for the Cross-link.
Select Ethernet (Cross-link) from the Port/method used for the connection list.
Enter the Default Address, IP Address and HMI Type for the desired device.
Adding the Cross-link device
Note that Connection 1 is linked to the controller by COM Port while Connection
2 is linked to the controller by Cross-Link Ethernet.
If the operator terminal using Connection 1 is to access data from the controller linked to Connection 2, follow these steps:
Controller register address setup:
Example: Specify the address of the controller register, 2/C0 for Siemens S7-200.
Note that controller register 2/C0 refers to Connection 2 on the Connection tab.
/ denotes the separation from the register address.
3. There are three ways to set this up:
a) Double-click on the object. Select the Attributes tab. For Write under Vari-
able enter the location 2/Q0.0.
b) Enter the address of the controller register in the object attributes dialog box.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
201
Ethernet Communication
In the example the address is 2/C0.
c) Click ... to display the Address/Constant Input dialog box.
Select 2-Connection 2 from the Connection list. Enter the address in the Device
Type and Addr./Value boxes. In the example the address is C0.
202
Click OK and 2/C0 will appear in the object attribute dialog box.
4. Download the edited application to the first operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Ethernet Communication
Setup in the second operator terminal
5. The setup steps are the same as for the first operator terminal, with the difference that the controller device in Connection 1 of the second operator terminal is the controller device in Connection 2 of the first operator terminal. Note that the
Addr./Value of the controller device Connection 2 must be changed.
The connections in operator terminal 2
6. Download the H-Designer application file to operator terminal 1 and operator terminal 2. Connect the link to the controllers and network.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
203
Ethernet Communication
204
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Multi-Channel Communication
7 Multi-Channel Communication
Since there are many different vendors and models of all kinds of equipment on the market, users often have a difficult time with data collection and integration. The operator terminal model with 2 COM Ports and an Ethernet connection can be used to connect controllers or other equipment (such as temperature controllers, servers, inverters etc.) from different vendors in order to integrate and collect data using an operator terminal or PC.
Note:
This feature is not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
7.1 Connection
COM1, COM2 or the Ethernet Port can be used to link the Multi-Channel connection.
The link can be set up via RS232, RS422 or RS485, with the connection method based on needs and available equipment. For Ethernet, RJ45 has to be used to set up the link. The controller must also be Ethernet-enabled.
For connection method and setup, please see the chapter
Operator Terminal and Controller
.
Multi-Channel Connection
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
205
Multi-Channel Communication
7.2 Connection Setup
The Multi-Channel connection setup includes the controller type and its parameters.
Follow the steps below to set up the connection:
1. In H-Designer, select File/New. The Applications Properties dialog box is displayed. On the General tab, select the type of the first controller from the Con-
troller/PLC list, for example, Mitsubishi FX Series.
Selecting the type of the first controller
206
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Multi-Channel Communication
2. On the Connection tab, select the method of connection for the first controller from the Port/method used for the connection list. Enter the addresses in the
HMI Address box and controller’s Default Address box and make the appropriate selections for Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity and Stop Bits.
Setup of the connection with the first controller
Note:
If SW5 = ON on the operator terminal, the parameters of the first linked controller must be set up according to the Configuration Table in the operator terminal’s System Menu.
If SW5 = OFF, the parameters of the first linked controller must be set up according to the Connection tab in Application/Workstation Setup in H-Designer. The switches are described in the Installation and Operation Manual for the operator terminal.
3. To add a second controller, click Add on the Connection tab, and select, for example, Simatic S7-200 via PPI; 1-to-1.
Adding a second linked controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
207
Multi-Channel Communication
4. Enter the addresses in the HMI Address box and controller’s Default Address box and make the appropriate selections for Baud Rate, Data Bits, Parity and
Stop Bits.
208
Setup up of the connection with the second controller
5. If the communication port is already being used, the following error message will be displayed.
Error message when the port is already being used
6. To add an Ethernet-enabled controller, click Add again, to add a third controller, for example, ModBus TCP/IP Device.
Adding a third, Ethernet-enabled controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Multi-Channel Communication
7. Enter the addresses in the Default Address and IP Address boxes.
Setup of the connection with the third, Ethernet-enabled controller
8. Click OK to finish the setup. To change the setup later, simply select Applica-
tion/Workstation Setup.
Description of the Devices block on the Connection tab
Item Description
Add
Remove
Click to add a new connection device/controller.
Click to delete a connection device.
The first connection (Connection 1) cannot be deleted.
Rename Click to change Device Name or Device Type.
For Connection 1, only the Device Name can be changed. The Device
Type can be changed on the General tab.
No. column Numbered according to the order in which devices are added and cannot be changed.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
209
210
Multi-Channel Communication
7.3 Read/Write Address Setup
Since there is more than one type of controller, a read/write address for each controller has to be assigned. The symbol / denotes the separation of the connection number from the register address.
Note:
This function is not available for all operator terminal models: please refer to
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
for details.
The connection in section
is used in this example.
1
2
3
No.
Device Name
Connection 1
Connection 2
Connection 3
Device Type
Mitsubishi FX Series
Simatic S7-200 (via PPI;1 to 1 )
Modbus TCP/IP Device
Perform the following steps:
1. For Connection 1, in the Write and Read boxes, enter 1/Y0 for the bit address and 1/D100 for the register address. 1 is for No. column 1, and can be omitted, so enter Y0.
2. For Connection 2, in the Write and Read boxes, enter 2/Q0.0 for the bit address. Note that 2 refers to Connection No. 2 and / denotes the separation from its register address.
3. For Connection 3, in the Write and Read boxes, enter 3/1 for the bit address.
Note that 3 refers to Connection No. 3 and / denotes the separation from its register address.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
8 Macros
8.1 Macro Function
H-Designer offers user a convenient and powerful macro application. It enables the operator terminal to execute a number of tasks: Arithmetic, Logic, Flow Control,
Data Transfer, Comparison, Conversion and system service instructions, for example. Using macros can also significantly reduce program size and optimize controller efficiency. Macros not only allow the operator terminal to communicate with the controller, but can also connect it to other devices. Macros provide an efficient integration system as well as an economical hardware application structure.
8.2 Macro Classifications
Macros offer a number of functions for different situations and applications. The relevant macro window can be used to define an application according to needs. The operator terminal will execute the macro commands in accordance with different modes.
Macros can be categorized into Application Macros, Screen Macros, ON/OFF
Macros and Sub-Macros.
8.2.1
Application Macros
There are three types of macro commands in the Application menu.
1. INITIAL Macro: The INITIAL Macro is used for data initialization and communication parameter declarations. This command is executed only once when an application is started, and the start-up screen does not appear until this command is executed. There is one INITIAL Macro in an application.
2. BACKGROUND Macro: When the operator terminal runs the application, these macros will be executed cyclically. The maximum size of macro commands are 30 rows. The macro commands will execute whatever the current screen.
Common uses for the BACKGROUND Macro are communication control and controller sample data conversion.
3. CLOCK Macro: When the operator terminal runs this application, these macros will be executed every 500 ms. Common uses for the CLOCK Macro are display control, controller bit monitor, timer control and data timer conversion.
8.2.2
Screen Macros
There are three types of macro commands in the Screen menu.
1. OPEN Macro: The OPEN Macro is executed when the screen is commanded to be opened. Common uses for the OPEN Macro are screen initialization, display control, internal register or bit initialization.
2. CLOSE Macro: The CLOSE Macro is executed when the screen is commanded to be closed. The CLOSE Macro will execute its command once.
3. CYCLIC Macro: The CYCLIC Macro is executed cyclically when the screen is displayed. The operator terminal will execute the BACKGROUND Macro and
CLOCK Macro periodically.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
211
Macros
8.2.3
ON/OFF Macros
There are two ON/OFF Macro commands for push-button objects.
212
ON/OFF macros are available for the button object
ON Macro: The ON Macro is executed when the button is clicked and sets a bit to
ON. Common uses for the ON Macro are push-button actions, chain process control, initial screen display and controller register and bit initialization.
OFF Macro: The OFF Macro is executed when the button is clicked and released sets a bit to OFF. The operator terminal will execute the OFF Macro commands once. Common uses for the OFF Macro are push-button actions, sequence process control and displaying the close screen.
8.2.4
Sub-Macros
The Sub-Macro can be selected from the Object menu.
Sub-Macro: The Sub-Macro is a sub-command of Macro. The Sub-Macro is executed by the operator terminal with the CALL command. Common uses for the Sub-
Macro are to edit and save some basic functions and macro arithmetic commands.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
8.3 Macro Commands
The following chart details the macro commands and their formats. For the set up procedure, please see the next section.
Operation Format A1* A2* A3* Data Format
Controller
Data
SHL
SHR
MOV
BMOV
FILL
CHR
IF==
IF!=
IF>
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
MOD
OR
AND
XOR
A1 = ADD (A2, A3)
A1 = SUB (A2, A3)
A1 = MUL (A2, A3)
A1 = DIV (A2, A3)
A1 = MOD (A2, A3)
A1 = A2 | A3
A1 = A2 & A3
A1 = A2^A3
A1 = A2<<A3
A1 = A2>>A3
A1 = A2
BMOV (A1, A2, A3)
FILL (A1, A2, A3)
CHR (A1, ”A2”)
IF A1 == A2 GOTO A3
IF A1! = A2 GOTO A3
IF A1>A2 GOTO A3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2, 4 2, 4 DW/Signed -
2, 4 2, 4 DW/Signed -
2, 4 2, 4 DW/Signed -
2, 4 2, 4 DW/Signed -
2, 4 2, 4 DW/Signed -
2, 4 2, 4 DW -
2, 4 2, 4 DW
2, 4 2, 4 DW
-
-
2
2
0, 2
2, 4 2, 4 DW
2, 4 2, 4 DW
0, 2, 4 -
0, 2 0, 2 2, 4
DW
2
2
2, 4 2, 4
5 -
2, 4 2, 4 4
2, 4 2, 4 4
2, 4 2, 4 4
-
DW/Signed -
DW/Signed -
-
-
DW/Signed -
-
-
Yes
Yes
IF>=
IF<
IF A1>=A2 GOTO A3
IF A1<A2 GOTO A3
2, 4 2, 4 4
2, 4 2, 4 4
IF<= IF A1<=A2 GOTO A3 2, 4 2, 4 4
IF AND ==0 IF A1 AND A2==0 THEN GOTO A3 2, 4 2, 4 4
IF AND !=0 IF A1 AND A2!=0 THEN GOTO A3 2, 4 2, 4 4
IF==ON IF A1 = ON GOTO 3 4 -
IF==OFF
IF-THEN
IF A1 = OFF GOTO
IF condition ** THEN DO
ENDIF
3
2, 4
4
2, 4
-
-
IF-THEN-
ELSE
Nest IF-
THEN-ELSE
IF condition ** THEN DO
ELSE DO
ENDIF
IF condition ** THEN DO
IF-THEN-ELSE
ELSE DO
IF-THEN-ELSE
ENDIF
2, 4 2, 4 -
2, 4 2, 4 -
DW/Signed
DW/Signed
DW/Signed
DW
DW
Bit
Bit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Condition ** -
Condition **
Condition **
-
-
ELIF IF condition 1** THEN DO
ELIF condition 2** THEN DO
ELIF condition 3** THEN DO
ENDIF
2, 4 2, 4 Condition ** -
** Condition includes A1==A2, A1!=A2, A1>A2, A1>=A2, A1<A2, A1<=A2, (A1&A2)==0,
(A1&A2)!=0, A1==ON and A1==OFF. A1 and A2 are only for internal memory and constant.
* The usable range of memory will be identified according to the commands. The numbers in the table represent: 0 = Controller Device (word), 1 = Controller Device (bit),
2 = Internal Memory (word), 3 = Internal Memory (bit), 4 = Constant, 5 = ASCII Character
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
213
Macros
Operation Format A1* A2* A3* Data Format
Controller
Data
CLRB
INVB
BCD
BIN
W2D
B2W
W2B
SWAP
GOTO
LABEL
CALL
RET
FOR
NEXT
SETB
Goto label A1
Label A1
Call A1
Return
For A1
Next
Bit setting
Bit resetting
Bit inversion
A1 = BCD (A2)
A1 = BIN (A2)
A1 = W2D (A2)
A1 = B2W (A2, A3)
A1 = W2B (A2, A3)
SWAP (A1, A2)
4
4
2
2
2
2
-
-
2, 4 -
-
2, 4 -
-
1, 3 -
2
2
1, 3 -
1, 3 -
2
2
2
2
2
2, 4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2, 4
2, 4
-
Bit
Bit
Bit
DW
DW
Signed
-
-
-
-
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
MAX
MIN
A2H
H2A
A1 = MAX (A2, A3)
A1 = MIN (A2, A3)
A1 = A2H
A1 = H2A (A2)
TIMETICK A1 = TIMETICK
COMMENT #A1 = ”Chars”
SYS SYS (A1, A2)
SYS (SET_TIMER,N)
SYS (STOP_TIMER,N)
SYS (STOP_COUNTER,N)
SYS (WAIT_TIMER,N)
SYS (INI_COM,N)
SYS (GET_CHAR,N)
SYS (GET_CHARS,N)
SYS (PUT_CHAR,N)
SYS (PUT_CHARS,N)
SYS (READ_WORDS,N)
SYS (READ_BITS,N)
SYS (WRITE_WORDS,N)
SYS (WRITE_BIT,N)
SYS (SUM_ADD,N)
2
2
2
2
2
5
2, 4
2, 4
2
2
-
-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2, 4
2, 4
-
-
DW/Signed
DW/Signed
DW
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SYS (SUM_XOR,N) 4 -
* The usable range of memory will be identified according to the commands. The numbers in the table represent: 0 = Controller Device (word), 1 = Controller Device (bit),
2 = Internal Memory (word), 3 = Internal Memory (bit), 4 = Constant, 5 = ASCII Character
214
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
8.3.1
Arithmetic
Note:
Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @,
RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory). The data format is word, doubleword, signed binary and unsigned binary.
Format: A1 = A2 + A3
Description: Adds A2 and A3 and saves the result in A1.
ADD Format: A1 = A2+A3. Adds A2 and A3 and saves the result in A1.
SUB Format: A1 = A2-A3. Subtracts A3 from A2 and saves the result in A1.
MUL Format: A1 = A2×A3.
DIV Format: A1 = A2/A3. A1 is the quotient and A3 cannot be zero.
MOD Format: A1 = A2%A3. A1 is the remainder and A3 cannot be zero.
8.3.2
Logical
Note:
Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @,
RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory). The data format is word, doubleword etc. (no signed binary, floating point number arithmetic).
0
0
1
1
A
0
1
0
1
B
0
1
1
1
F
0
0
1
1
A
0
1
0
1
B
0
0
0
1
F
Truth tables for OR (to the left) and AND (to the right) logical operations
OR Format: A1=A2 | A3.
Performs the bit-wise OR operation on A2 (word) and A3 (word) and saves the result in A1 (word), or on A2 (double-word) and A3 (double-word) and saves the result in
A1 (double-word).
AND Format: A1 = A2 & A3. Performs the bit-wise AND operation on A2
(word) and A3 (word) and saves the result in A1 (word) or on A2 (double-word) and
A3 (double-word) and saves the result in A1 (double-word).
XOR Format: A1=A2 ^ A3. Performs the bit-wise exclusive OR operation on
A2 (word) and A3 (word) and saves the result in A1 (word) or on A2 (double-word) and A3 (double-word) and saves the result in A1 (double-word).
SHL Format: A1=A2 << A3. Shifts A2 (word) left by A3 bits and saves the result in A1 (word). The left shift command puts 0 into bit 0 and the last bit will shift out.
If the displacement (A3) is greater than 16, then 16 will be the most shiftable amount.
Alternatively, shifts A2 (double-word) left by A3 bits and saves the result in A1 (double-word). The left shift command puts 0 into bit 0 and the last bit will shift out. If the displacement (A3) is greater than 32, then 32 will be the most shiftable amount.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
215
Macros
SHR Format: A1=A2 >> A3. Shifts A2 (word) right by A3 bits and saves the result in A1 (word). The right shift command puts 0 into bit 15 and the first bit will shift out. If the displacement (A3) is greater than 16, then 16 will be the most shiftable amount.
Alternatively, shifts A2 (double-word) right by A3 bits and saves the result in A1
(double-word). The right shift command puts 0 into bit 31 and the first bit will shift out. If the displacement (A3) is greater than 32, then 32 will be the most shiftable amount.
8.3.3
Data transfer
Note:
Both the MOV and BMOV commands can be located in the controller memory or internal memory. These include @, RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory).
The data format for this command is word.
MOV Format: A1 (word) = A2 (word), A1 (double-word) = A2 (double-word).
The MOV command copies the value of A2 to A1 and the value of A2 is unchanged.
If A1 is located in the controller, it represents the A2 data in the operator terminal internal register in the controller. If A2 is located in the controller, it will represent the data read and copied from the operator terminal internal register A1. the memory block starting at A1. A3 specifies the number of words to be copied. The data format is word. The BMOV command copies a block of length A3 starting at
A2 to the A3 long block starting at A1. The A2 data is unchanged. A3 must be between 2 and 524. Format: BMOV (A1, A2, A3).
the value of A2. A3 specifies the number of words to be filled. The data format is word. The FILL command fills a block of A3 words starting at A1 with the A2 data.
The A2 data is unchanged. A3 must be between 2 and 524. data is in ASCII format.
8.3.4
Comparison
Note:
Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @,
RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory).
IF == Format: IF A1 == A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if
A1 is equal to A2.
IF!= Format: IF A1!=A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is not equal to A2.
IF > Format: IF A1>A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is greater than A2.
IF >= Format: IF A1>=A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if
A1 is greater than or equal to A2.
IF < Format: IF A1<A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if A1 is less than A2.
IF <= Format: IF A1<=A2 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to LABEL A3 if
A1 is less than or equal to A2.
216
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
IF AND == 0 Format: IF (A1&A2) == 0 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to
LABEL A3 if the result of an AND operation on A1 and A2 is 0.
IF AND! = 0 Format: IF (A1&A2)! = 0 THEN GOTO LABEL A3. Goes to
LABEL A3 if the result of an AND operation on A1 and A2 is not 0.
IF == ON Format: IF A1==ON THEN GOTO LABEL A2. If bit A1 is ON
(1), goes to LABEL A2.
IF ==OFF Format: IF A1==OFF THEN GOTO LABEL A2. If bit A1 is OFF
(0), goes to LABEL A2.
Example
Command: IF . . . DO; ELIF . . . DO; ELSE DO; ENDIF
Description: Use an IF statement when you want your macro to choose between two or more options. An IF statement consists of the keyword IF, a condition to be evaluated, the keyword THEN, the keyword DO, and the keyword ENDIF, as shown below:
IF condition THEN DO
# statements to be executed if condition is true
ENDIF
The condition can be one of the following:
A1 == A2
A1 != A2
A1 > A2
A1 >= A2
A1 < A2
A1 <= A2
(A1 & A2) == 0
(A1 & A2) != 0
A1 == ON
A1 == OFF
The following IF statement structures are provided:
IF-THEN structure
The simplest IF statement evaluates a condition and performs a specified action if the condition is true. If the condition is not true, the entire statement is ignored. For example:
IF @100 == 50 THEN DO
CALL 50
ENDIF
If @100 equals 50, sub-macro 50 is called. If @100 contains anything else, the entire statement is ignored.
IF-THEN-ELSE structure
An IF statement can also specify one or more statements to be executed if the condition is false. This option is indicated with the keyword ELSE, as shown below.
IF condition THEN DO
ELSE DO
# statements to be executed if condition is true
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
217
Macros
# statements to be executed if condition is false
ENDIF;
In the example below, if @100 equals 50, the sub-macro 50 is called. If @100 is not equal to 50, sub-macro 1 is called following the else statement.
IF @100 == 50 THEN DO
ELSE DO
CALL 50
CALL 1
ENDIF
Nested IF-THEN-ELSE structure
You can create nested IF statements, in which one IF statement is embedded in another:
IF first condition THEN DO
IF second condition THEN DO
# statements to be executed if second condition is true
ELSE DO
# statements to be executed if second condition is false
ENDIF
ELSE DO
IF third condition THEN DO
# statements to be executed if third condition is true
ELSE DO
# statements to be executed if third condition is false
ENDIF
ENDIF
In the following example, if the value of @100 is 50, sub-macro 50 is called. If the value of @100 is 100, sub-macro 100 is called. If @100 is not equal to either of those values, the sub-macro 1 is called.
IF @100 == 50 THEN DO
CALL 50
ELSE DO
IF @100 == 100 THEN DO
CALL 100
ELSE DO
CALL 1
ENDIF
ENDIF
218
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
ELIF structure
The ELIF statement is provided to create IF structures in which the ELIF branch of one IF statement leads to another option:
IF first condition THEN DO
# statements to be executed if condition is true
ELIF second condition THEN DO
# statements to be executed if condition is false
ELIF third condition THEN DO
# statements to be executed if third condition is false
ENDIF
In the following example, if @100 equals 50, sub-macro 50 is called. If @100 is not equal to 50, the program continues to the ELIF statement to test if @100 is equal to
100. If @100 equals 100, sub-macro 100 is called. If @100 is not equal to 100, the program moves to the next ELIF, and so on.
IF @100 == 50 THEN DO
CALL 50
ELIF @100 == 100 THEN DO
CALL 100
ELIF @100 == 150 THEN DO
CALL 150
ENDIF
You cannot define a label inside an IF statement.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
219
Macros
8.3.5
Flow Control
Note:
Only internal memory can be used in these commands.
GOTO Format: GOTO LABEL A1. Goes to LABEL A1 unconditionally. The
GOTO command will cause a branch to the specified label (Label A1). LABEL A1 must be in the macro.
LABEL Format: LABEL A1. Note that no two labels are allowed to have the same number in one macro but the same number in different macros is acceptable.
CALL Call Sub-macro. Format: CALL A1. The CALL command can assign control to a sub-macro. Common uses of sub-macros are to execute some specific functions, to pass the parameter table and complex instruction sets. Note that the specified sub-macro must exist and return via the RET command when the end of the sub-macro is reached. Then the next macro will be executed. The number of submacros is from 001 to 512, and they can be named. A sub-macro can also be assigned to CALL another sub-macro.
RET Return to macro. The RET command only exists in sub-macro, although
CALL exists in macro. Each RET command must have a corresponding CALL command.
Note that the maximum number of FOR loops is 3, for example, the FOR A1.
.NEXT. FOR loop is formed by the set of FOR and NEXT commands and executes the macro instructions within the FOR loop A1 times. A1 can be a variable or a constant. When A1 is 0, the macro will skip the FOR loop and execute the line of code following the NEXT command. When A1 is greater than 0, the macro will execute the loop continuously until the end of the FOR loop. The value of A1 can be changed within the FOR commands. Note that if A1 is too great, the CPU will overload and malfunction.
The FOR/NEXT loop command can execute the program repeatedly. Each FOR command must have one corresponding NEXT command. One is allowed to have up 3 nested FOR loops, such as FOR @1…, FOR @2…, FOR@3... NEXT, NEXT,
NEXT.
END End the macro. The END command represents the end of the macro.
The macro will not execute the next line of code after the END command but will start at the first line of code next time the program is run.
Note:
The END command represents the end of the macro and is invalid in sub-macro. Submacro must use the RET command, otherwise, the program will cause errors.
220
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
8.3.6
Data Conversion
Note:
Only internal memory can be used in these commands. The internal memory includes @,
RCPW, CB, RCPNO and *@ (indirect internal memory).
BCD Convert BIN to BCD. Format: A1 = BCD (A2). This command is used to convert A2 (integer, word or double-word) from a binary number to a BCD number and saves the result in A1. Valid integer values of A2 are between 0 and 9999
(word) or 0 and 99999999 (double-word).
BIN Convert BCD to BIN. Format: A1 = BIN (A2). This command is used to convert A2 from a BCD number (word or double-word) to a binary number and saves the result in A1 (integer, word or double-word). Valid BCD numbers are between 0 and 9999 (word) or 0 and 99999999 (double-word).
W2D Convert WORD to DOUBLE WORD. Format: A1 = W2D (A2). The
W2D command is used to convert A2 from a WORD number (integer) to a DOU-
BLE WORD (integer) and saves the result in A1 (double-word, signed, or unsigned).
Valid integer values of A2 are between 0 and 65535 (word, unsigned) or -32768 and
32767 (word, signed). This function can extend the size of a 16-bit signed integer
(word) to a 32-bit integer (double-word).
B2W Convert BYTE to WORD. Format: A1 = B2W (A2, A3). The byte array starting at A2 with the size A3 and the result is saved in the memory starting at A1
(word). The high bytes of the word array are set to 0.
W2B Convert WORD to BYTE. Format: A1 = W2B (A2, A3). The word array starting at A2 with the size A3. The result is saved in memory starting at A1. The conversion will discard the high bytes of the A2 word array.
SWAP Swap the Bytes, Format: SWAP (A1, A2). The SWAP command is used to swap the low byte and high byte of each word of a memory block starting at A1.
A2 specifies the size of the memory block in words. After execution, the Al data will be changed.
MAX Maximum. Format: A1 = MAX (A2, A3). Sets A1 to the larger of A2 and
A3. (The data format can be word, dword, signed binary, or unsigned binary.)
MIN Minimum. Format: A1 = MAX (A2, A3). Sets A1 to the smaller one of
A2 and A3. (The data format can be word, dword, signed binary, or unsigned binary.)
A2H Convert 4-digit hex number in ASCII character form into a binary number. Format: A1 = A2H (A2). The character of the fourth digit is in word A2 and the characters of the other digits are in the words following A2 in sequence. The result will be saved in A1. For example, suppose A2 is @200 and the data in @210=9538H.
After the conversion, the result will be saved in A1=@210 and will be @200=0039H,
@201=0033H, @202=0035H, and @203=0038H. (The data format is word only.)
H2A Convert a 16-bit binary number into a 4-digit hex number in ASCII character form. Format: A1 = A2H (A2). The number to be converted is in A2. The character of the fourth digit will be saved in A1 and the characters of the other digits will be saved in the words following A1 in sequence. For example, suppose A2 is @100 and the data in @100=1234H. After the conversion, the result will be saved in
A1=@110 and will be @110=0031H, @111=0032H, @112=0033H, and
@113=0034H. (The data format is word only.)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
221
Macros
8.3.7
Bit Setting
Note:
Both internal memory and controller bit can be used in these commands, including
@nnn.b and RCPWnnn.b.
SETB Set bit to ON. Format: SETB A1.
CLRB Set bit to OFF. Format: CLRB A1.
INVB Inverse bit state. Format: INVB A1.
8.3.8
Others
There are three special commands to use.
TIMETICK Get the current system time tick (CPU internal clock time). Format: A1= TIMETICK (). The system time tick is increased by 1 in every 100 ms.
COMMENT This is a non-executable instruction and it is used to comment macros.
SYS There are a number of system services which can be used in the SYS command. Please see below for full details:
1. SET_TIMER Specify the internal timer.
Format: SYS (SET_TIMER,N).
@N: Time number. N is between 0 and 7.
@N+1: Current Timer Value.
@N+2: Timer Limit.
@N+3:Time-up Flag.
@N+4: Type of Operation as below:
0 Timer will stop when it reaches the default setting, the flag will be set to 1.
1 Timer resets to 0 automatically when the flag is changed to 0 or 1. When the flag is 1, the timer resets to 0 automatically. When the flag is 0, the timer resets to 0 automatically.
STOP_TIMER Stops the internal timer.
Format: SYS (STOP_TIMER,N).
2. STOP_COUNTER Stop the internal counter.
Format: SYS(STOP_COUNTER,N).
3. WAIT_TIMER Wait for the time-up event in the internal timer.
Format: SYS (WAIT_TIMER,N).
The macro instruction following this command will not be executed until the timer reaches the Timer Limit. Remember that the corresponding timer must be activated by the SET_TIMER service before requesting this service.
222
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
4. INIT_COM Select and initialize a COM port.
Format: SYS (INIT_COM,N).
The word @n specifies the communication setting of the COM port. The format of the setting is shown below:
Bit 1, Bit 0 DATA Bit S 10:7 Bit S, 11:8 Bit S.
Bit 2 STOP Bit S 0:1 Bit,1:2 Bit S.
Bit 4, Bit 3 PARITY.> 00:NONE, 01:ODD, 11:EVEN.
Bit 6, Bit 5 COM PORT > 00: COM1, 01: COM2, 10: COM3, 11:
COM4.
Bit 7 Not used.
Bit11, Bit 10, Bit 9, Bit 8 0001: 115200, 0010: 57600, 0011: 38400,
0110: 19200, 1100: 9600, Others: 4800.
Bit 15 Computer Protocol Driver; 0: Disable, 1: Enable
If this service is successful, the word @n+1 will be set to 1; otherwise, it will be set to 0.
Some models provide a Computer Protocol slave driver for the second COM port. This function provides communication between PC/another operator terminal on the second COM port. The operator terminal can communicate with the controller over the first COM port and the connection steps are the same as the normal steps. The P PC can read from the internal registers @0-@8191 (the data in W0-W8191 corresponds to @0-@8191).
When using the Computer Protocol driver, this function is unavailable to
GET_CHAR, GET_CHARS, PUT_CHAR, and PUT_CHARS.
5. GET_CHAR Gets a character from the COM port.
Format: SYS (GETCHAR,N).
The character will be saved in the low byte of the word @n. If there is no input, the word @n will be set to be -1(ffffH).
6. GET_CHARS Gets a number of characters from the COM port.
Format: SYS (GETCHARS,N).
The word @n specifies the maximum number of characters to receive. The actual number of characters received is saved in word @n+1. The characters received will be saved in the low bytes of the words @n+2, @n+3, @n+4, and so on.
7. PUT_CHAR Sends a character in the low byte of the word @n to the
COM port.
Format: SYS (PUTCHAR,N).
If this service is successful, the word @n+1 will be set to 1; otherwise, it will be set to another value.
8. PUT_CHARS Sends the characters in the low bytes of the words starting from @n+2 to the COM port.
Format: SYS (PUTCHARS,N).
The word @n specifies the number of characters to be sent and the actual number of characters sent is saved in the word @n+1.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
223
Macros
9. SUM_ADD Calculates the sum of a block of words by normal arithmetic addition.
Format: SYS (SUM_ADD,N).
The output data is saved in “@N+3”. This feature offers a more convenient application for macros. For example, the command SYS(SUM_ADD,30) (here
N = 30) will calculate the sum of the @30, @31, @32, @33 internal registers.
@N=30 represents the pointer parameter, and the internal value of @30 must be
0.
@N+1(@31) represents the starting address of the block.
@N+2(@32) represents the size of the WORDS block.
@N+3(@33) represents the initial value of the summand and the sum will be saved in this address automatically. The command must be set before execution.
Most communication protocols regulate the initial value of the summand = 00H or FFH, so please refer to initial value assigned by the vendor.
10.SUM_XOR Calculate the sum of a block of words by the bit-wise logical exclusive-or operation and save the result in the specified address.
Format: SYS(SUM_XOR,N).
The output data will be saved in “@N+3”. This function is convenient for macro communication applications. For example, SYS(SUM_XOR,50) (here N = 50) will calculate the sum of the @50, @51, @52, @53 internal registers. Execution of this command requires the internal values of @50, @51, @52 and @53.
@N=50 represents controller station number and the internal value of @50must be 0 if no controller station is required.
@N+1(@51) represents the starting address of the block.
@N+2(@52) represents the size of the WORDS block.
@N+3(@53) represents the initial value of the summand and the sum will be saved in this address automatically. The command must be set before execution.
Most communication protocols regulate the initial value of the summand = 00H or FFH, so please refer to initial value assigned by the vendor.
11.READ_WORDS Read a number of words from controller word devices or internal memory and save the result in the specified address.
Format: SYS (READ_WORDS,N).
The data will be saved in “@+5”. This command is powerful for use in communication with any controller registers and can be used for setting and monitoring controller data. Take, for example, SYS(READ_WORDS,80) (here N = 80).
Execution of this command requires the internal values of @80, @81, @82,
@83, @84, @85 and @86.
@N (@80) represents the controller station number, and the internal value of
@80 must be 0 if no controller station is required.
@N+1(@81) represents the device type setting. For the device type of controller, please see the chapter
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
for full details.
@N+2(@82) represents the low word of the device address.
@N+3(@83) represents the high word of the device address.
@N+4(@84) represents the auxiliary address if required else set to 0.
@N+5(@85) represents the address of the internal memory to receive the data and the size of data is specified by N+6(@86).
@N+6(@86) represents the number of words to be read.
224
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Macros
12.READ_Bit Read a controller bit device or internal bit and save the data in the specified address.
Format: SYS (READ_Bit,N).
The data will be saved in “@+5”. This command is powerful for use in communication with any controller bit-state and can be used to set and monitor controller data. For example, SYS(READ_bit,80) (here N = 80). Execution of this command requires the internal values of @80, @81, @82, @83, @84 and @85.
@N(@80) represents the controller station number, and the internal value of
@80 must be 0 if no controller station is required.
@N+1(@81) represents the device type. For controller device types, please see the chapter
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
details.
@N+2(@82) represents the low word of the device address.
@N+3(@83) represents the high word of the device address.
@N+4(@84) represents the auxiliary address if required else set to 0.
@N+5(@85) represents the address of the internal memory to receive the data.
N+5(@85) DATA = 1 if the bit is ON; DATA = 0 if the bit is OFF.
13.WRITE_WORDS Writes a block of data in internal memory to controller word devices or internal memory.
Format: SYS(WRITE_WORDS,N).
The data will be saved in “@N+5”. This command is powerful for the random modification of controller data and can be used to set and monitor controller data. For example, SYS(WRITE_WORDS,90) (here N = 90). Execution of this command requires the internal values of @90, @91, @92, @93, @94, @95 and
@96.
@N(@90) represents the controller station number, and the internal value of
@90 must be 0 if no controller station is required.
@N+1(@91) represents the device type. For controller device types, please see the chapter
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
details.
@N+2(@92) represents the low word of the device address.
@N+3(@93) represents the high word of the device address.
@N+4(@94) represents the auxiliary address if required else set to 0.
@N+5(@95) represents the source address while the size of the continuous block of data is assigned by N+6 (@96).
@N+6(@96) represents the number of words in the data block.
14.WRITE_Bit Set a controller bit device or internal bit to the state of an internal word.
Format: SYS(WRITE_Bit,N).
The source address is”@+5”. This command is powerful for the random modification of controller data and can be used to set and monitor controller data. For example, SYS(WRITE_Bit,90) (here N = 90). Execution of this command requires the internal values of @90, @91, @92, @93, @94 and @95.
@N(@90) represents the controller station number, and the internal value of
@90 must be 0 if no controller station is required.
@N+1(@91) represents the device type. For controller device types, please see the chapter
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
details.
@N+2(@92) represents the low word of the device address.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
225
226
Macros
@N+3(@93) represents the high word of the device address.
@N+4(@94) represents the auxiliary address if required else set to 0.
@N+5(@95) represents the address of the internal memory to receive the data.
N+5(@95) DATA = 1 if the bit is ON; DATA = 0 if the bit is OFF.
8.4 Cautions
The last line of code must be the RET command, otherwise an error will occur when you compile.
Except in sub-macro, the END command marks the end of the macro.
The CPU will execute other programs after the execution of INITIAL Macro,
CLOCK Macro, ON/OFF Macro, OPEN Macro and CLOSE Macro.
For BACKGROUND Macro, CYCLIC Macro and sub-macro, the CPU executes the 30 command lines once. The CPU will then execute other programs. The CPU will execute the 30 command lines following the last executed command until the next cycle.
To use the macro communication function, the user must define the related communication format for INICOM. This command is only used once, so it is usually entered in INITIAL Macro.
8.5 Internal Memory
The operator terminal provides some internal registers that can be read from/written to. By using these internal registers, users can make more efficient and convenient use of the macro function. The internal registers can not only enhance macro with infinite functions, but can also store a great deal of arithmetic source data and results.
Note that this system provides the internal registers divided into RAM and ROM.
Details of the four types of internal memory follow:
Words
RCPNO
RCPWn
CBn
@n
Device Type Size
0x81
0x82
0x83
0x85
W
W
W
W
Address Aux. Address R/W
0 (only one word)
0 - 8191
0 - 31
0
8191 0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R
R/W
Bits Device Type
CBn.b (b=0-f) 0x83
RCPWn.b (b=0-f) 0x84
@n.b (b=0-f) 0x86
0 -31
0 - 8191
8191
Address Aux. Address R/W
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 15
R/W
R
R/W
1. RCPNO.
2. The n value of RCPWn is based on the size of the recipe and the maximum number. The data register can be used as bit.
3. The n value of CBn is based on the size of the control block. The current size is
2-32. This data register can be used as bit.
4. @n: Internal Register. The size is 8191 WORDS (n=0-8191). This data register can be used by bit.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9 Communication between
Operator Terminal and Controller
Note:
The Register and Range of Relay Numbers in this document refer to the setup range available in H-Designer. In practice, please make sure not to exceed the maximum range defined by the controller CPU in use. Otherwise communication errors will occur.
This chapter provides current information on the settings of the supported controllers at the time of writing. As controller vendors continue to release new models, controller data capacity, data range and drivers are also often updated. Please visit
www.beijerelectronics.com
for the latest information.
For correct communication between the controller and operator terminal, the Com-
munication Format, Station, Baud Rate and Data Format settings must be consistent.
Before connection, please setup the operator terminal and controller communication parameter and DIP switch settings.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
227
228
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.1 Allen Bradley Micrologic 1000/1500
The controller data settings and ranges which H-Designer can access: Word Device.
Register Type Format
Register
Range
Device Type/
Aux. Address
Data Size
R/W
Output file
Input file
Status file
O:0.n
I:1.n
S2:nn
Bit file
Timer flag
B3:nnn
T4:nnn
Timer Preset Value T4:nnn.pre
Timer Accumulator Value T4:nnn.acc
n=0-3 n=0-3 nn=0-65 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
4
4
3
4
0
0
2
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Counter flag
Counter Preset Value
C5:nnn
C5:nnn.pre
Counter Accumulator Value C5:nnn.acc
Control file R6:nnn nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254
7
8
9
10
5
6
5
5
Word
Word
Word
Word
Control Size of Bit Array
Control Reserved file
Integer file
Floating point number
R6:nnn.len
R6:nnn.pos
N7:nnn
F8:nnn nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254
11
12
13
14
6
6
7
8
Word
Word
Word
Word
The operator terminal does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER and CONTROL FILES.
It is necessary to open the files which the operator terminal will access in the Allen
Bradley controller.
Data format and range of the controller ON/OFF location which H-Designer can access: Dip Device.
Relay Type Format Relay Range
Device Type/
Aux. Address
Data Size
R/W
Output O:0.n/bb
Input I:1.n/bb
Status S2:nn/bb
Bit B3:nnn/bb
0xC0 0-15 Word n=0-3; 0xC1 0-15 Word nn=0-65; 0-15 Word nnn=0-254; 0-15 Word
Timer T4:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; 0-15 Word
Timer Preset Value T4:nnn.pre/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 0xC5 0-15 Word
Timer Accumulator
Value
T4:nnn.acc/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 0xC6 0-15 Word
Counter flag C5:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 0xC7 0-15 Word
Counter Preset
Value
Counter Accumulator Value
C5:nnn.pre/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15
C5:nnn.acc/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15
Control R6:nnn/bb
0xC8
0xC9 nnn=0-254;
0-15
0-15
0-15
Word
Word
Word
Control Size of Bit
Array
R6:nnn.len/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 0xCB 0-15 Word
Control Reserved R6:nnn.pos/bb nnn=0-254; bb=0-15 0xCC 0-15 Word
Integer N7:nnn/bb nnn=0-254; 0-15 Word
The operator terminal does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER and CONTROL FILES.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Cable Drawings
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Operator terminal to RS232C connection on controller 1761-CBL-PM02
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switches as follows:
Format
Communication
Format
Node Address
Transmission
Speed
Transmission
Format
Controller Setting
RS232C
19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
COM Port FULL DUPLEX
CRC Error Check YES
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232/422/485
When using RS422, set DIP switch SW10=OFF.
When using RS485, set DIP switch SW10=ON.
Set PLC Station No. in H-Designer according to the controller setting.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in
H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
229
230
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.2 Allen Bradley PLC-5
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size R/W
Output file
Input file
Status file
O:nnn
I:nnn
S:nnn nnn= 0-277 nnn= 0-277 nnn= 0-127
Word
Word
Word
Bit file
Timer file
Counter file
Bfff:nnn
B:nnn
Tfff:nnn
T:nnn
Tfff:nnn.PRE
T:nnn.PRE
Tfff:nnn.ACC
T:nnn.ACC
Cfff:nnn
C:nnn
Cfff:nnn.PRE
C:nnn.PRE
Cfff:nnn.ACC
C:nnn.ACC
fff= 3 or 9-999; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999 fff= 4 or 9-999; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999 fff=5 or 9-999; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999
Word
Word
Word
Control file Rfff:nnn
R:nnn
Rfff:nnn.LEN
R:nnn.LEN
Rfff:nnn.POS
R:nnn.POS
Nfff:nnn
N:nnn fff=6 or 9-999; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999
Word
Integer file fff=7 or 9-999; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999
Word
The operator terminal can read up to 30 words in one read command. The operator terminal does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER and CONTROL
FILES.
It is necessary to open the files which the operator terminal will access in the Allen Bradley controller.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Data format and range of the controller ON/OFF location which H-Designer can access: Bit Device.
Relay Type Format Relay Range
Output file
Input file
Status file
Bit file
O:nnn/bb
I:nnn/bb
S:nnn/bb
Bfff:nnn/bb nnn= 0-277; bb= 0-17 nnn= 0-277; bb= 0-17 nnn= 0-127; bb= 0-15 fff= 3 or 9-999; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb= 0-15 fff= 4 or 9-999; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb= 0-15
Timer file Tfff:nnn/bb
Tfff:nnn.PRE/bb
Tfff:nnn.ACC/bb
T:nnn/EN
T:nnn/TT
T:nnn/DN
Counter file
Control file
Cfff:nnn/bb
Cfff:nnn.PRE/bb
Cfff:nnn.ACC/bb
Cfff:nnn/CC
Cfff:nnn/CD
Cfff:nnn/DN
Cfff:nnn/OV
Cfff:nnn/UN
Cfff:nnn/UA
Rfff:nnn/bb
Rfff:nnn.LEN/bb
Rfff:nnn.POS/bb
Rfff:nnn/EN
Rfff:nnn/EU
Rfff:nnn/DN
Rfff:nnn/EM
Rfff:nnn/ER
Rfff:nnn/UL
Rfff:nnn/IN
Rfff:nnn/FD fff=5 or 9-999; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb= 0-15 fff=6 or 9-999; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb= 0-15
Integer file Nfff:nnn/bb fff=7 or 9-999; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-999; bb= 0-15
The operator terminal can read up to 480 bits in one read command. The operator terminal does not support block read for the bits in TIMER, COUNTER and CONTROL FILES.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C on PLC-5
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
231
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format
Communication
Format
Node Address
Transmission
Speed
Transmission
Format
Controller Setting
RS232C PLC-5
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
COM Port
Stop bit: 1-bit
FULL DUPLEX
BCC Error Check YES
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232/422/485
When using RS422, set DIP switch SW10=OFF.
When using RS485, set DIP switch SW10=ON.
Set PLC Station No. in H-Designer according to the controller setting.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in
H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
232
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.3 Allen Bradley SLC-503/504
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Output file
Input file
Status file
O:nn
I:nn
S:nn nn= 0-30 nn= 0-30 nn= 0-127
Word
Word
Word
Bit file
Timer file
Counter file
Bfff:nnn
B:nnn
Tfff:nnn
T:nnn
Tfff:nnn.PRE
T:nnn.PRE
Tfff:nnn.ACC
T:nnn.ACC
Cfff:nnn
C:nnn
Cfff:nnn.PRE
C:nnn.PRE
Cfff:nnn.ACC
C:nnn.ACC
fff= 3 or 10-255; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254 fff= 4 or10-255; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254 fff=5 or10-255; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254
Word
Word
Word
Control file Rfff:nnn
R:nnn
Rfff:nnn.LEN
R:nnn.LEN
Rfff:nnn.POS
R:nnn.POS
Nfff:nnn
N:nnn fff=6 or 10-255; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254
Word
Integer file fff=7 or 10-255; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254
Word
The operator terminal can read up to 30 words in one read command. The operator terminal does not support block read for the registers in TIMER, COUNTER and CONTROL
FILES.
It is necessary to open the files which the operator terminal will access in the Allen Bradley controller.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
233
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Data format and range of the controller ON/OFF location which H-Designer can access: Bit Device.
Relay Type Format Relay Range
Output file
Input file
Status file
Bit file
O:nn/bb
I:nn/bb
S:nn/bb
Bfff:nnn/bb nn= 0-30; bb= 0-15 nn= 0-30; bb= 0-15 nn= 0-31; bb= 0-15 fff= 3 or 10-255; default file is 3 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb= 0-15 fff= 4 or 10-255; default file is 4 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb= 0-15
Timer file
Counter file
Tfff:nnn/bb
Tfff:nnn.PRE/bb
Tfff:nnn.ACC/bb
T:nnn/EN
T:nnn/TT
T:nnn/DN
Cfff:nnn/bb
Cfff:nnn.PRE/bb
Cfff:nnn.ACC/bb
Cfff:nnn/CU
Cfff:nnn/CD
Cfff:nnn/DN
Cfff:nnn/OV
Cfff:nnn/UN fff=5 or 10-255; default file is 5 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb= 0-15
Control file Rfff:nnn/bb
Rfff:nnn.LEN/bb
Rfff:nnn.POS/bb
Rfff:nnn/EN
Rfff:nnn/DN
Rfff:nnn/ER
Rfff:nnn/UL
Rfff:nnn/IN
Rfff:nnn/FD fff=6 or 10-255; default file is 6 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb= 0-15
Integer file Nfff:nnn/bb fff=7 or 10-255; default file is 7 if fff omitted; nnn=0-254; bb= 0-15
The operator terminal can read up to 480 bits in one read command. The operator terminal does not support block read for the bits in TIMER, COUNTER and CONTROL FILES.
Cable Drawings
234
Operator terminal to RS232C on SLC-503/504
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication
Format
Node Address
Transmission
Speed
Transmission
Format
RS232C SLC-503-504 COM2 = RS232/422/485
When using RS422, set DIP switch SW10=OFF.
When using RS485, set DIP switch SW10=ON.
Set PLC Station No. in H-Designer according to the controller setting.
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
COM Port
Stop bit: 1-bit
FULL DUPLEX
BCC Error Check YES
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in
H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
235
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.4 Allen Bradley IQ Master Servo
Controller
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
G type
V type
G type
V type
Format
Gnn
Vnn
WGnn
WVnn
Register Range
nn= 1-64 nn= 1-64 nn= 1-64 nn= 1-64
Data Size
Double Word (32 bits)
Double Word (32 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Range Relay Type
I type
O type
B type
F type
Inn
Onn
Bn
Fnn
Format
Cable Drawings
nn= 1-48 nn= 1-24 nn= 1-8 nn= 1-64
236
Operator terminal to RS232 port (9-pin male) on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
0
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.5 ABB Comli (Slave Mode)
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format
Word IO
V type
MWnnnnn
RWnnnnn
Register Range Data Size
nnnnn= 0-37760 (must be a multiple of 8) Word (16 bits) nnnn= 0-3071 Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Bit IO
Format
Mnnnnn nnnnn= 0-37777 (8 bits)
Realy Range
Cable Drawing
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
01 (controller sets 2-197)
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
237
238
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.6 Computer (as Master/Slave/V2/Null) /
Modbus Master
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Data Register
Format
Wnnnn
Register Range
nnnn= 0-2047
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Bit Realy
Cable Drawing
Bnnnn
Format
nnnn= 0-1023
Realy Range
Operator terminal to RS232 port
Note:
This figure is a PC simulation, and the hook up method depends on the actual controller pin position.
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C (RS422/RS485) RS232C (RS422/RS485)
Station No NONE
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
COMPUTER (AS MASTER) V2 does not only include the function of COMPUTER (AS MASTER)
- it also can inform the slaves when the data is changed (e.g. value input).
The Null function includes macro and ladder but no communication with any controller.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.7 Delta DVP
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access:Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format
S_Data
X_Data
Y_Data
M_Data
T_Register
C_Register
D_Register
C_Register
Snnnn
Xnnn
Register Range
nnnn=0-1008 (must be a multiple of 16) nnn= 0-360 (X0-X7, X10-X17, must be a multiple of 20)
Ynnn nnn= 0-360 (Y0-Y7, Y10-Y17, must be a multiple of 20)
Mnnnn Nnnn=0-1264, must be a multiple of 16
Tnnn nnn= 0-255
Cnnn nnnn= 0-127
Dnnnn nnn= 0-1279
Cnnn nnn= 232-255
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Double-Word
Relay Type Format
S_Data
X_Data
Y_Data
M_Data
T_Coil
C_Coil
Snnnn
Xnnn
Ynnn
Mnnnn
Tnnn
Cnnn nnn=0-1023
Relay Range
nnn=0-377 (Oct. code) nnn=0-377 (Oct. code) nnnn=0-1279 nnn=0-254 nnn=0-254
Block
Multiple of 16
Multiple of 16
Multiple of 16
Multiple of 16
Multiple of 16
Multiple of 16
Note:
X_Data and Y_Data are Oct. code, such as X0-X7, X10-X17, X20-X27 or X30-X37.
Connection
The operator terminal can be connected to the controller RS232 port using a DELTA
8-pin male connector (PC DELTA DVP PLC).
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
01
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 2-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set PLC Station No.= 01 in H-Designer
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
239
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.8 Ero TFS/THS/LFS
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access:
Register Type Format
Word Register mmm:Wnnn
Register Range
mmm=0-255 ; nnn=0-529
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Realy
Format
mmm:Bnnn
Cable Drawing
Realy Range
mmm=0-255 ; nnn=1-342
Operator terminal to RS485 port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS485
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
RS485
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
240
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.9 Facon FB
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Special Relay
Step Relay
Timer Present Value
Counter Present Value
WXnnn
WYnnn
WMnnnn nnnn=0-9984; (0 or multiple of 8) Word
WMnnnn nnnn=0-9984; (0 or multiple of 8) Word
WSnnn
RTnnnn
RCnnnn nnn=0-9984; (0 or multiple of 8) Word nnn=0-9984; (0 or multiple of 8) Word nnn=0-9984; (0 or multiple of 8) Word nnnn=0-9999 nnnn=0-9999
Data Register Rnnnnn
32-bit Counter Present Value DRCnnn nnnn=0-65534 nnn=2000-255
Data Register Dnnnnn nnnn=0-65534
The operator terminal can read up to 32 words in one read command.
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Special Relay
Step Relay
Timer Flag
Counter Flag
Cable Drawings
Format
Xnnnn
Ynnnn
Mnnnn
Mnnnn
Snnnn
Tnnnn
Cnnnn nnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 nnnn=0-9999 nnnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999 nnn=0-9999
Relay Range
Operator terminal to RS232C on FB-MC controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
241
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
1
9600/19200 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set controller station 01 in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
Facon FB Series (RS232/RS485) for RS232 w/o RTS control (3-PIN cable) or RS485 Facon
FB Series (RS232-RTS) for RS232 with RTS control (5-PIN cable, RTS, CTS with connect), not for RS485.
242
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.10 Festo FPC
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access:Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input IWnnn nnn=0-255
Output QWnnn
Flag FWnnnn nnn=0-255 nnnn=0-9999
Timer
Counter
TWnnn
CWnnn
Register Rnnn
Timer_Preset TPnnn
Counter_Preset CPnnn nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=255 nnn=0-255
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Input
Output
Flag
Timer
Counter
Timer_on
Timer_off
Cable Drawing
Format Relay Range Block
Innn.bb
nnn=0-255; bb=0-15
Qnnn.bb
nnn=0-255; bb=0-15 b=0, e.g., I20.0
b=0, e.g., Q20.0
Fnnnn.bb
nnnn=0-9999; bb=0-15 b=0, e.g., F20.0
Tnnn nnn=0-255 None
Cnnn nnn=0-255
TONnnn nnn=0-255
TOFFnnn nnn=255
None
None
None
Operator terminal to controller (TTL to RS232C cable)
The operator terminal needs to use a FESTO TTL to RS232C cable connection, a
6-pin telephone connector with a controller port and a 9-pin male with 9-pin female.
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
243
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.11 Fuji NB
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Data Register
Special Register
Timer Current Value
Counter Current Value
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Latch Relay
Special Relay
Step Relay
Format
Dnnn
Dnnnn
TNnnn
CNnn
WXnn
WYnn
WMnn
WLnn
WMnnn
WSnnn
Register Range Data Size
nnn=hex number 0-3FF Word nnnn=hex number 8000-80FF Word nnn=hex number 0-1FF Word nn=hex number 0-FF nn=hex number 0-1F nn=hex number 0-1F nn=hex number 0-3F
Word
Word
Word
Word nn=hex number 0-3F nnn=hex number 800-81F nnn=hex number 0-3F
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type
Timer output
Counter output
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Latch Relay
Special Relay
Step Relay
Cable Drawings
Format
Tnnn
Cnn
Xnnn
Ynnn
Mnnn
Lnnn
Mnnnn
Snnn
Relay Range Block
nnn=hex number 0-1FF nn=hex number 0-FF nnn=hex number 0-1FF nnn=hex number 0-1FF
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0 nnn=hex number 0-3FF nnn=hex number 0-3FF
End with 0
End with 0 nnnn=hex number 8000-81FF End with 0 nnnn=hex number 0-3FF End with 0
244
Operator terminal to RS422 on NB/NS/NJ-CPU port
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS422
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
Controller Password
None
19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
COM = DIP switch RS422
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Stop bit: 1-bit
None or 0000-9999 The password needs to be set in the controller.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
245
246
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.12 GE Series 90 CCM
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Discrete Input
Discrete Output
Register
%Innnnn
%Qnnnnn
%Rnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288 nnnnn=1-12288 nnnnn=1-16384
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Discrete Input (%Innnnn), Discrete Output (%Qnnnnn): Address must be 1 or multiple of
16 + 1.
Relay Type
Discrete Input
Discrete Output
Cable Drawing
Format
%Innnnn
%Qnnnnn
Relay Range
nnnnn=1-12288 nnnnn=1-12288
Block
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
0
19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.13 GE-Fanuc 90-SNP
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Discrete Inputs %Innnnn nnnnn=1-12288;1 or multiple of 16 + 1 Word
Discrete Outputs %Qnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288;1 or multiple of 16 + 1 Word
Discrete Temporaries %Tnnn nnn=1-256; 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 Word
Discrete Internals
%SA Discrete
%SB Discrete
%SC Discrete
%Mnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288;1 or multiple of 16 + 1 Word
%SAnnn
%SBnnn
%SCnnn nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16 + 1
Word
Word
Word
%S Discrete
Genius Global Data
Registers
Analog Inputs
%Snnn
%Gnnnn
%Rnnnnn
%AInnnn nnn=1-128; 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 nnnn=1-7680; 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 nnnnn=2-16384 nnnn=1-8192
Analog Outputs %AQnnnn nnnn=1-8192
The operator terminal can read up to 50 words in one read command.
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Discrete Inputs %Innnnn nnnnn=1-12288
Discrete Outputs %Qnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288
Discrete Temporaries %Tnnn nnn=1-256
Discrete Internals
%SA Discrete
%SB Discrete
%SC Discrete
%Mnnnnn nnnnn=1-12288
%SAnnn
%SBnnn
%SCnnn nnn=1-128 nnn=1-128 nnn=1-128
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
%S Discrete
Counter Flag
%Snnn
%Gnnnn nnn=1-128 nnnn=1-7680
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
1 or multiple of 16 + 1
The operator terminal can read up to 800 bits in one read command.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C on controller mini-converter kit
Operator terminal to RS422 port on controller 9030 CPU
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
247
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS422 CPU port or
RS232C
Station No None
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Controller ID
Controller Password
Blanks
None or ********
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS422: Set SW10=OFF
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
The password needs to be set in the controller.
248
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.14 Hitachi EC
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Internal Register
Internal Register
Internal Register
WMnnn
WMnnn
WMnnn nnn=400, 402, 404, …, 654 nnn=700, 702, 704, …, 954 nnn=960, 962, 964, …, 990
Word
Word
Word
Timer/Counter Register TCnnn
Timer/Counter Register TCnnn nnn=100-195 nnn=200-295
The operator terminal can read up to 60 words in one read command.
Word
Word
Relay Type
Input Relay
Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Timer/Counter Relay
Format
Xnnn
Ynnn
Mnnn
TCnn
Relay Range Block
nnn=0-15, 20-35, 40-55, 60-75,
..., 180-195
X0, X20, X40… nnn=200-215, 220-235, 240-255,
..., 380-395
Y200, Y220… nnn=400-655, 700-955, 960-991 M400, M420… nn=0-95 TC0, TC1, TC80
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to controller programming port
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
CTS Handshaking
Stop bit: 1-bit
Enabled
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
When using exclusive protocol, you must set the controller peripheral mode selector to
COM2.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
249
250
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.15 Hitachi H/EH1
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Ext. Input
Ext. Output
Int. Output
Int. Output
Int. Output
CPU Link
CPU Link
WXnnnn
WYnnnn
WRnnnn
WRnnnn
WMnnn
WLnnn
WLnnnn nnnn=0-4FF9 nnnn=0-4FF9 nnnn=0-C3FF nnnn=F0000-F1FF nnn=0-3FF nnn=0-3FF nnnn=1000-13FF
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
T/C CV TCnnn nnn=0-511 Word (16 bits)
Hitachi H/EH1 Series must use procedure 1 protocol to communicate.
Hitachi EH2 Series must use procedure 2 protocol to communicate.
Ext. Input (WXnnnn) and Ext. Output (WYnnnn) registers cannot access the “Read
Block” function.
Relay Type Format Relay Range
Ext. Input
Ext. Output
Int. Output
Int. Output
CPU Link
CPU Link
On-delay timer bit
Single-shot timer bit
Xmnnnn
Ymnnnn
Rnnn
Mnnnn
Lnnnn
Lnnnnn
TDnnn
SSnnn m=0-4, nnnn=0-FF95 m=0-4, nnnn=0-FF95 nnn=0-7FF nnnn=0-3FFF nnnn=0-3FFF nnnnn=10000-13FFF nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Up counter
U/D counter up coil
U/D counter down coil
U/D counter contact
CUnnn
CTUnnn
CTDnnn
CTnnn nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511
T/C CV clear
Rising edge
CLnnn
DIFnnn nnn=0-511 nnn=0-511
Falling edge DFNnnn nnn=0-511
Ext. Input (WXnnnn) and Ext. Output (WYnnnn) cannot access the “Read Block” function.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
19200 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
251
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.16 Hust CNC Controller
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
16-bit variable Wnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
32-bit variable Dnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
Up to 28 variables can be read at one time.
16-bit variable (Wnnnnn):
Only used in word objects.
Only used in Bit 0-Bit 15 of each variable.
If written, Bit 16-Bit 31 will clear as 0.
32-bit variable (Dnnnnn):
Only used in double word objects.
Only used in Bit 0-Bit 31 of each variable.
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Double-word (32 bits)
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
1-bit variable Bnnnnn.bb
nnnnn=0-65534, bb=0-31 bb must be 0
I - bit data Innn nnn=0-255 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.
O - bit data Onnn
C - bit data Cnnn
S - bit data Snnn nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.
nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.
nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.
A - bit data Annnn nnn=0-1023 nnn must be 0 or multiple of 32.
I - Bit Data, O - Bit Data, C - Bit Data, S - Bit Data, A - Bit Data are read-only.
If written, the action will be invalid. (No error messages)
Cable Drawing
252
Operator terminal to RS232C port (9-pin male) on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No None
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
9600 (19200/38400) bps Set the SW5=OFF if parameters
Size: 7-bit are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters
Parity: EVEN are set in the operator terminal.
Stop bit: 2-bit
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.17 Idec Micro-3
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Shift Register
Timer Preset
Timer Current
Counter Preset
Xn
Yn
Mnn
Rnn
TPnn
Tnn
CPnn n=0-3 n=0-3 nn=0-31 nn=0-31 (read only) nn=0-31 nn=0-31 (read only)
Byte
Byte
Byte nn=0-48; must be 0 or multiple of 8 Bit
Word
Word
Word
Counter Current
Data Register
Cnn
Dnn nn=0-31 nn=0-99
Word
Word
Calender/CLOCK Wn n=0-6 Word
The operator terminal can read up to 50 words in one read command.
Timer Preset and Counter Preset are read-only. If the value of TP or CP exists in Data
Register, the value of Data Register will be read.
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Input Relay
Output Relay
Xnb
Ynb n=0-3; b=0-7 n=0-3; b=0-7 b=0, e.g., X10 b=0, e.g., Y00
Internal Relay
Shift Register
Timer Status
Counter Status
Mnnb
Rnn
Tnn
Cnn nn=0-31; b=0-7 nn=0-63 nn=0-31 (read only) nn=0-31 (read only) b=0, e.g., M10
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
The operator terminal can read up to 800 bits in one read command.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to controller Program Loader RS485 port (MICRO3-CPU PORT)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
253
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS485
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
CTS Handshaking
0-31; 255
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Disabled
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS485: Set SW10=ON
Set PLC Station to 255 in H-Designer
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
If only one controller is used, set the Station No. as 255. In a network, set the Station
No. to 0-31.
254
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.18 Jetter Nano_B
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
User Register Rnnnnn nnnnn=0-32767 Double-word (32 bits)
User Register WRnnnnn nnnnn=0-32767 Word (16 bits)
Relay Type Format
Input Relay Innbb
Output Relay Onnbb
Flag Relay Fnnnn
Relay Range Block
nn=1-16,bb=01-08 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 nn=1-16,bb=01-08 1 or multiple of 16 + 1 nnnn=0-2301 If nnn<256, must be 0 or multiple of 24.
If nnn>255 and <2048, must be multiple of 24 +16.
If nnn>2047, must be multiple of 24 + 8.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (15-pin male)
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (9-pin male)
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
255
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.19 Jetter Delta
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
User Register Rnnnnn nnnn=
0-20479
21000-24999
31000-34999
41000-44999
50200-59999
61440-64999
User Register WRnnnnn nnnn=
0-20479
21000-24999
31000-34999
41000-44999
50200-59999
61440-64999
Data Size
Double-word (32 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type Format
Input Relay Inbb
Output Relay Onbb
Flag Relay Fnnnn
Relay Range Block
n=1-8,bb=01-64 bb=01 n=1-8,bb=01-64 bb=01 nnnn=0-2047 Must be >255 and, and multiple of 24 +16.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (15-pin male)
256
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (9-pin male)
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.20 Klockner Moeller PS
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Word Marker MWnnnnn nnnnn=0-32766 Word
The operator terminal can read up to 32 words in one read command.
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Bit Marker0 Mnnnnn.b
nnnnn=0-32766; b=0-7 b=0, e.g., M10.0
The operator terminal can read up to 512 bits in one read command.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C programming port on controller CPU ZB4-303-KB1
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No 0=PS4-201
1=PS316
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set PLC Station to 0/1 in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
257
258
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.21 Koyo SA/TI 325/330
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format
TMR/CTR nnn
Register Values mmm
Register Range Data Size
Word
Accumulator mmm=octal number 400-576; mmm must be a multiple of 2
Even Bytes
Relay Type Format
Input/Output Bits Bnnn
Input/Output Bits Bnnn
Internal Relay Bits Bnnn
Shift Register Bits
TMR/CTR Bits
Bnnn
Bnnn
Relay Range
nnn=octal number 0-157 nnn=octal number 700-767 nnn=octal number 160-377 nnn=octal number 400-577 nnn=octal number 600-677
Block
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
When operator terminal changes a relay’s state, the operator terminal must read 1 byte (8 relays). After changing the corresponding bit, the operator terminal will write the byte to the controller. These actions will take more than one controller scan. PLC ladder cannot control other bits (relay) of the byte before the operator terminal has completed the Change the Relay action, otherwise these bits (relay) will return to their initial values. In other words, the controller’s control action will be resumed.
For example, if the operator terminal wants to change B3’s state, it will read B0-B7.
After the corresponding bit B3 is changed, the operator terminal will write the entire byte to the controller. The PLC ladder command will be cancelled after the operator terminal writes the changes.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller SA21
Note:
KOYO SA21 series E02-DM and TI305-02DM have the same wiring.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS422 or RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Operation Mode
Mode
Stop bit: 1-bit
RUN Mode
ASCII Mode
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
SW2-8=ON
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
259
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.22 Koyo Direct DL/Koyo SU Series/TI435
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Timer Accumulated Vnnn nnn=octal number 0-177
Counter Accumulated Vnnnn nnnn=octal number 1000-1177
V Memory Vnnnn nnnn=octal number 1400-7777
Link Relays
Input Status
Output Status
Control Relays
Vnnnnn
Vnnnnn
Vnnnnn
Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number 40000-40037 nnnnn=octal number 40400-40423 nnnnn=octal number 40500-40523 nnnnn=octal number 40600-40635
Stage
Timer Status
Counter Status
Spec. Relay 1
Spec. Relay 2
Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number 41000-41027
Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number 41100-41107
Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number 41140-41147
Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number 41200-41205
Vnnnnn nnnnn=octal number 41216-41230
Data Size
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type
Input Status
Output Status
Control Relays
Stage
Timer Status
Counter Status
Spec. Relay 1
Spec. Relay 2
Linker Relays
Cable Drawings
Format Relay Range
Xnnn
Ynnn
Cnnn
Snnn nnn=octal number 0-477 nnn=octal number 0-477 nnn=octal number 0-737 nnn=octal number 0-577
Tnnn nnn=octal number 0-177
CTnnn nnn=octal number 0-177
SPnnn nnn=octal number 0-137
SPnnn nnn=octal number 320-617
GXnnn nnn=octal number 0-777
Block
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
End with 0
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller
260
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (CPU240)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
01
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Comm. Protocol Mode HEX. (TISOFT AUX26)
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
261
262
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.23 LG Glofa GM6
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Image
Input Image
Output Image
%IWn.m.b
%IDn.m.b
%QWn.m.b
n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-3 Word (16 bits) n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-1 Double-word (32 bits) n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-3 Word (16 bits)
Output Image %QDn.m.b
Internal memory %MWnnnn n=0-1, m=0-7, b=0-1 Double-word (32 bits) nnnn=0-4095 Word (16 bits)
Internal memory %MDnnnn nnnn=0-65534 Double-word (32 bits)
The operator terminal can read up to 60 words (30 double-words) in one read/write command and only supports CPU modules.
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Input Image
Output Image
%IXn.m.bb
%QXn.m.bb
n=0-1, m=0-7, bb=0-63 bb must be 0 or multiple of 16
Internal memory %MXnnnnn n=0-1, m=0-7, bb=0-63 bb must be 0 or multiple of 16 nnnnn=0-2047 n. must be 0 or multiple of 16
Cable Drawing
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (9-pin male)
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C (RS422/RS485) COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
(RS422/RS485)
Station No 0
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
19200 (9600/38400) bps Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are
Size: 8-bit set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are
Parity: NONE set in the operator terminal.
Stop bit: 1-bit
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.24 LG K10/60H/200H
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Auxiliary Relay
Input/Output Relay
Keep Relay
Link Relay
Special Relay
Timer Current Value
Counter Current Value
Mnn
Pnn
Knn
Lnn
Fnn
Tnnn
Cnnn nn=0-63 nn=0-15 nn=0-31 nn=0-31 nn=0-15 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Byte
Byte
Byte
Bit
Word
Word
Word
Timer Set Value
Counter Set Value
TSnnn
CSnnn nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Word
Word
Data Register Dnnnn nnnn=0-1023 Word
The operator terminal can read up to 60 words in one read command.
Relay Type Format
Auxiliary Relay Mnnb
Input/Output Relay Pnnb
Keep Relay Knnb
Link Relay
Special Relay
Timer Relay
Counter Relay
Lnnb
Fnnb
Tnnn
Cnnn
Relay Range Block
nn=0-63; b=hex number 0-F End with b=0 nn=0-63; b=hex number 0-F End with b=0 nn=0-63; b=hex number 0-F End with b=0 nn=0-63; b=hex number 0-F End with b=0 nn=0-63; b=hex number 0-F End with b=0 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Must be 0 or multiple of 16
Must be 0 or multiple of 16
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller K200H CPU
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
263
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
00
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1/COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
264
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.25 LG K200S
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input/Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Keep Relay
PWnn
MWnnn
KWnn nn=0-63 nnn=0-191 nn=0-31
Link Relay
Special Relay
Timer TWnnn
Counter CWnnn
Data Register
LWnn
FWnn nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
DWnnnn nnnn=0-9999
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type Format
Input/Output Relay Pnnb
Auxiliary Relay Mnnnb
Keep Relay
Link Relay
Knnb
Lnnb
Special Relay Fnnb
Timer Tnnn
Counter Cnnn
Relay Range
nn=0-15; b=0-f nnn=0-191; b=0-f nn=0-31; b=0-f nn=0-63; b=0-f nn=0-63; b=0-f nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Cable Drawing
Block
b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0
None
None
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (9-pin male)
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
38400 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
265
266
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.26 LG K300S
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input/Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Keep Relay
Link Relay
Special Relay
LWnn
FWnn
Timer TWnnn
Counter CWnnn
Step Controller
Data Register
PWnn
MWnnn
KWnn nn=0-31 nnn=0-191 nn=0-31 nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
SWnnnn nnnn=0-9999
DWnnnn nnnn=0-9999
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Input/Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Keep Relay
Link Relay
Special Relay
Cable Drawing
Format Relay Range
PWnnb nn=0-31; b=0-f
MWnnnb nnn=0-191; b=0-f
KWnnb nn=0-31; b=0-f
LWnnb
FWnnb nn=0-63; b=0-f nn=0-63; b=0-f
Block
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No 0
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.27 LG Master-K10S/K30S/60S/100S
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format
Input/Output Relay PWn
Auxiliary Relay
Keep Relay
MWnn
KWnn
Link Relay
Special Relay
Timer
Counter
Data Register
LWnn
FWnn
TWnnn
CWnnn
DWnnn
Register Range
nn=0-5 nnn=0-31 nn=0-15 nn=0-15 nn=0-15 nnn=0-127 nnn=0-127 nnn=0-255
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type Format
Input/Output Relay Pnb
Auxiliary Relay Mnnb
Keep Relay
Link Relay
Knnb
Lnnb
Special Relay
Timer
Counter
Fnnb
Tnnn
Cnnn
Relay Range
n=0-5; b=0-f nn=0-31; b=0-f nn=0-15; b=0-f nn=0-15; b=0-f nn=0-15; b=0-f nnn=0-127 nnn=0-127
Cable Drawing
Block
b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 b must be 0 n.. must be 0 or multiple of 16 n.. must be 0 or multiple of 16
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller (9-pin male)
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
267
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.28 Matsushita FP
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Device Type/
Aux. Address
Block Read
R/W
Internal Relay WRnn
Special Internal Relay WRnnn
Link Relay
External Input Relay
WLnnn
WXnnn
External Output Relay WYnnn
Timer/Counter PV EVnnn
Timer/Counter SV
Data Register
SVnnn
DTnnnn nn=0-97 (875) nnn=900-910 nnn=0-127 (639)
nnn=0-127 (255) nnn=0-127 (255) nnn=0-254 (2047) nnn=0-254 (2047) nnnn=0-2047 (32764)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Special Data Register DTnnnn
Link Data Register LDnnn nnnn=9000-9255 nnn=0-127 (8447)
8
9
0
0
File Register FLnnnnn nnnn=0-8191 (32764) 10 0
The operator terminal can read up to 27 words in one read command.
The register setting range of FP10SH is nnnnn = 0-32764.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Internal Relay
External Input Relay
Rnnnb
Special Internal Relay Rnnnb
Link Relay Lnnnb
Xnnnb nn=0-97 (875); b= 0-f b=0, e.g., R1230 nnn=900-910; b= 0-f b=0, e.g., R9100 nnn=0-127 (639); b=0f b=0, e.g., L110 nnn=0-127 (255); b=0f b=0, e.g., X00
External Output Relay Ynnnb nnn=0-127 (255); b=0f b=0, e.g., Y00 nnn=0-254 (2047) Must be 0 or multiple of 16 Timer Flag Content Tnnn
Counter Flag Content Cnnn nnn=0-254 (2047) Must be 0 or multiple of 16
The operator terminal can read up to 432 bits in one read command.
The relay setting range of FP10SH is nnnn = 0-2047.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C LINK on FP3 CCU or LINK port on FP1
268
Operator terminal to RS422 programming port (FP3 CPU port)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format
Communication
Format
Station No
Controller Setting
RS422 or RS232C
Transmission
Speed
Transmission
Format
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
02-27
FP CPU PORT=238
FP1: Set computer link
19200/9600 bps
FP10SH -CPU: Set 115.2K bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Set PLC Station to 01 in H-Designer,
CPU PORT 238
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
269
270
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.29 Mirle DX
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
IR Area
DM Area
Format
IRnnn nnn=0-111
DMnnnn nnnn=0-2367
Register Range Data Size
Word
Word
Relay Type
IR Area
Cable Drawings
Format Relay Range
IRnnnbb nnn=0-111, bb=00-15
Block
bb=00
Operator terminal to RS422 port on MIRLE DX
Operator terminal to RS422 port on MIRLE SBC 20
Operator terminal to RS232C port on MIRLE nNDX
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format
Communication
Format
Station No 0
Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
RS232C/RS422 COM2=RS232C/RS422
Transmission
Speed
Transmission
Format
9600 bps
Size DX, SBC20: 8-bit NDX: 8-bit
Parity DX, SBC20:ODD NDX: NONE
Stop bit DX, SBC20: 1-bit NDX: 1-bit
Set PLC Station to 00 in
H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
271
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.30 Mitsubishi FX
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device..
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Auxiliary Relay
Special Auxiliary
Relay
Status Relay
Input Relay
Output Relay
Timer PV
Mnnnn
Mnnnn
Snnn
Xnnn
Ynnn
Tnnn nnnn=0-3071; must be 0 or multiple of 8 Byte nnnn=8000-8255; must be 0 or multiple of 8 Byte nnn=0-999; must be 0 or multiple of 8 nnn=octal number 0-377; end with 0 nnn=octal number 0-377; end with 0 nnn=0-254
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
16-bit Counter PV Cnnn
32-bit Counter PV Cnnn nnn=0-199 nnn=200-255
Word
Double-word
Data Register
Special Data Register
Dnnn
Dnnnn nnn=0-1023(7999) D1000=FILE REGISTER nnnn=8000-8255
The operator terminal can read up to 32 words in one read command.
Word
Word
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Auxiliary Relay
Special Auxiliary
Relay
Status Relay
Input Relay
Output Relay
Timer Flag
Mnnnn
Mnnnn
Snnn
Xnnn
Ynnn
Tnnn
0-3071
8000-8255
0-999
Octal number 0-377
Octal number 0-377
0-255
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
End with 0
End with 0
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Counter Flag Cnnn 0-255 Must be 0 or multiple of 8
The operator terminal can read up to 512 bits in one read command.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS422 port of controller FX2 CPU
272
Operator terminal to Program Loader port of controller (FX2n/FX0n CPU port)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS422
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
273
274
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.31 Mitsubishi A
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Relay
Output Relay
Link Relay
Special Relay
Latch Relay
Flag
Xnnn
Ynnn
Bnnn
Internal Relay Mnnnn
Mnnnn
Lnnnn
Fnnnn
Timer PV
Counter PV
TNnnn
CNnnn
Data Register Dnnnn
Special Register Dnnnn
File Register
Link Register
Rnnnn
Wnnn nnn=hex number 0-7FF; end with 0 nnn=hex number 0-7FF; end with 0 nnn=hex number 0-7FFF; end with 0
Word
Word
Word nnnn=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word nnnn=9000-9255;-9000 must be multiple of 16 Word nnnn=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 nnnn=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16
Word
Word nnn=0-999 nnn=0-999 nnnn=0-8191 nnnn=9000-9255 nnnn=0-8191 nnn=hex number 0-FFF
Peripheral Input
Relay
PXnnn nnn=0-7FF must be 0 or multiple of 16
The operator terminal can read up to 64 words in one read command.
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type Format Relay Range Block
Input Relay
Output Relay
Link Relay
Internal Relay
Special Relay
Latch Relay
Flag
Timer Set
Timer Coil
Counter Set
Xnnn
Ynnn
Bnnn
Mnnnn
Mnnnn
Lnnnn
Fnnnn
TSnnn
TCnnn
CSnnn
Counter Coil CCnnn
Peripheral Input
Relay
Xnnnb nnn=hex number 0-7FF End with 0 nnn=hex number 0-7FF End with 0 nnn=hex number 0-FFF End with 0
0-8191 Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
9000-9255
0-2047
The last 3 digits must be multiple of 16.
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
0-2047
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-999
0-7ff
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
Must be 0 or multiple of 16.
The operator terminal can read up to 512 bits in one read command.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Cable Drawings
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Operator terminal to AJ71UC24-R2/S8
Operator terminal to AJ71UC24 RS422
Operator terminal to AnA and AnA/AnS/AnU CPU port RS422
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
275
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS422 or RS232C
AJ71UC24 SW1=ON RS422
SW1=OFF RS232C
Station No 00 (CPU port)
00 (AISJ71C24-S3)
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS422: Set SW10=OFF
Set PLC Station to 00 in H-Designer.
Set operator terminal station to 255.
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
00-31 (AJ71UC24)
9600/19200 bps
CPU port=9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Comm. Protocol
Check Sum
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Format 1;5;A
YES
Write during Run Allowed
For AISJ71C24 or AJ71c24, set the operator terminal station no. to 255 and PLC station no. to 0 and connect with controller CPU port. To communicate via COM2, please set the DIP switch = off and the communication parameters to 9600, 8, 0DD, 1.
276
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.32 Mitsubishi QnA
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Link Relay
Counter Coil
Counter Current Value
Counter Contact
Data Register
Direct Input
Direct Output
Flag
Latch Relay
Internal Relay
File Register
Step Relay
Special Link Relay
Retentive Timer Coil
Special Register
Special Relay
Retentive Timer Current
Value
Retentive Timer Contact SSn
Special Link Register SWn
Timer Coil
Timer Current Value
TCn
TNn
Timer Contact
Edge Relay
Link Register
Input Relay
TSn
Vn
Wn
Xn
Output Relay
Index Register
File Register
Yn
Zn
ZRn
Ln
Mn
Rn
Sn
SBn
SCn
SDn
SMn
SNn
Bn
CCn
CNn
CSn
Dn
DXn
DYn
Fn
Format Register Range Data Size
n=hex number 0-1FFF; end with 0 Word n=0-1023; must be 0 and multiple of 16 Word n=0-1023 Word n=0-1023; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-12287 n=hex number 0-1FFF; end with 0
Word
Word n=hex number 0-1FFF; end with 0 Word n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-32767 Word n=0-8191; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=hex number 0-7FF; end with 0 Word n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-2047 Word n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-2047 Word n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=hex number 0-7FF n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-2047 n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=0-2047; must be 0 or multiple of 16 Word n=hex number 0-1FFF n=hex number 0-1FFF; end with 0 n=hex number 0-1FFF; end with 0 n=0-15 n=hex number 0-FE7F
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type Format
Link Relay
Counter Coil
Counter Contact
Direct Input
Direct Output
Flag
Latch Relay
Internal Relay
Step Relay
Special Link Relay
Retentive Timer Coil
Special Relay
Retentive Timer Contact SSn
Timer Contact TSn
Sn
SBn
SCn
SMn
Bn
CCn
CSn
DXn
DYn
Fn
Ln
Mn
Relay Range
hex number 0-1FFFF
0-1023
0-1023 n=hex number 0-1FFF n=hex number 0-1FFF
0-2047
0-8191
0-8191
0-8191 n=hex number 0-7FF
0-2047
0-2047
0-2047
0-2047
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
277
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Relay Type
Timer Coil
Edge Relay
Input Relayr
Output Relay
Cable Drawings
Format
TCn
Vn
Xn
Yn
Relay Range
0-2047
0-2047 n=hex number 0-1FFF n=hex number 0-1FFF
Operator terminal to QnA CPU port (RS232)
Operator terminal to Q Series C24 (RS232)
278
Operator terminal to Q Series C24 (RS422)
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format
Communication Format
Station No
Transmission
Speed
Transmission
Format
19200 bps
Controller Setting
RS422 or RS232C
00 (CPU port/Q Series C24)
Size CPU Port: 8-bit Q Series C24: 7-bit
Parity CPU Port: ODD Q Series C24: EVEN
Stop bit CPU Port: 1-bit Q Series C24:2-bit
Operator Terminal
Setting
COM2 = RS232C/
RS422/RS485
Set PLC Station to 00 in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in
H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.33 Modbus Slave
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Register
Format
Wnnnnn
Register Range Data Size
Relay
Relay Type
Cable Drawing
Bn
Format Relay Range
n=0-65535
Block
Operator terminal to RS232C port (9-pin male) on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C (RS422/RS485) COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
(RS422/RS485)
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600 bps (9600-115200) Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
(7), (EVEN/NONE), (2) set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
279
280
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.34 Modicon PC984 or Modbus (ASCII) or
TSX Quantum
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Registers
(Modicon PC 984/Modbus (ASCII)) nnnnn nnnnn= 30001-39999 (slave)
30001-31024 (master)
Word
Output Registers
(Modicon PC 984/Modbus (ASCII)) nnnnn nnnnn= 40001-49999 (slave)
40001-41024 (master)
Word
Input Registers (TSX Quantum) nnnnnn nnnnn= 300001-365535 Word
Output Registers (TSX Quantum) nnnnnn nnnnn= 400001-465535
The operator terminal can read up to 125 words in one read command.
Word
Relay Type Format Relay Range
Discrete Outputs
(Modicon PC 984/Modbus (ASCII))
Nnnnn nnnnn= 1-4999 (slave)
1-1024 (master)
Discrete Inputs
(Modicon PC 984/Modbus (ASCII))
Nnnnn nnnnn= 10001-19999 (slave)
10001-11024 (master)
Discrete Outputs (TSX Quantum) Nnnnn nnnnn= 000001-065535
Discrete Inputs (TSX Quantum) Nnnnn nnnnn= 100001-165535
The operator terminal can read up to 2000 bits in one read command.
Modbus (ASCII) master - V2 as Modbus (ASCII) master. In functional way, it will inform the connected controller automatically when the operator terminal data is changed.
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal series to controller RS232C CPU port
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C (RS422/RS485) COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Station No 1
01-247 (mem setup)
Set PLC Station 01 in H-Designer.
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
19200/9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
RTU Mode
(7,O,1);(7,E,1);(7,E,2)
(8,E,1);(8,O,1);(8,N,1)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
281
282
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.35 Omron C
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
IR Area
HR Area
AR Area
LR Area
TC Area
DM Area
Format
IRnnn
HRnn
ARnn
LRnn
TCnnn
DMnnnn
Register Range
nnn=0-511 nn=0-99 nn=0-27 nn=0-63 nnn=0-511 nnnn=0-6655
Block Read
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Max. 28
Max. 28
Max. 28
Max. 28
Max. 28
Max. 28
Relay Type
IR Area
HR Area
AR Area
LR Area
TC Area
Format
IRnnnbb
HRnnbb
ARnnbb
LRnnbb
TCnnn
Relay Range
nnn=0-511; bb=00-15 nn=0-99; bb=00-15 nn=0-27; bb=00-15 nn=0-63; bb=00-15 nnn=0-511
Cable Drawings
Block
bb=00, e.g., IR12300 bb=00, e. g., HR2300 bb=00, e.g., AR100 bb=00, e.g., LR2300
Multiple of 16, e.g. TC16
Operator terminal to RS232C HOST LINK of LK201/C200HS/C28H/C40H/CQM1
Operator terminal to RS422 HOST LINK on C200H-LK202
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C/RS422/
RS485
Station No 00(00-31)
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format, initial value
19200/9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 2-bit
Operation Mode
Protocol
Monitor Mode
Multiple-Link
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
Set PLC Station to 00 in H-Designer
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
For CQM1 and CPU21, set the DM6648=0000.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
283
284
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.36 Omron CS1
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
IR Area (CIO Area) IRnnnn
HR Area
AR Area
HRnnn
ARnnn
LR Area
TC Area
DM Area
EM Area
LRnnn
TCnnnn nnnn=0-6143 nn=0-511 nn=0-959 nn=0-199 nnn=0-4095
DMnnnn nnnn=0-9999
EMm.nnnnn
m=0-c, nnnn=0-9999
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type Format
IR Area (CIO Area) IRnnnnbb
HR Area
LR Area
HRnnnbb
LRnnnbb
Timer Area
Counter Area
Tnnnn
Cnnnn
Cable Drawing
Relay Range
nnnn=0-6143; bb=00-15 nnn=0-511; bb=00-15 nnn=0-199; bb=00-15 nnnn=0-2047 nnnn=0-2047
Block
bb must be 00 bb must be 00 bb must be 00
Operator terminal to RS232 port (9-pin male) on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232C (RS422/RS485) COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
(RS422/RS485)
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
0 (0-31)
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Stop bit: 2-bit
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.37 Omron CV
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
CIO Area
TC Area
TC Area
AR Area
DM Area
Format
CIOnnnn
TCnnnn
TCnnnn
ARnnn
DMnnnn
Register Range
nnnn=0-2555 nnnn=0-1023 nnnn=2048-3071 nnn=0-511 nnnn=0-9999
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
CIO Area
TC Area
TC Area
Cable Drawings
Format
CIOnnnnbb
TCnnnn
TCnnnn
Relay Range
nnnn=0-2555; bb=00-15 nnnn=0-1023 nnnn=2048-3071
Block
bb must be 00
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
0
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 2-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
285
286
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.38 Parker 6K
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Command Format Register Range Data Size Data Range
Input !nTIN
Output
Alarm Status
!nTOUT
!INTHW
In
On
Asn n=0-8 n=0-8 n=1
Double-word
Double-word
Double-word
Axis Status !nTAS
System Status !TSS
User Status
Binary
!TUS
AXSn
SYSn
USSn n=1-8 n=1 n=1
Double-word
Double-word
Word
!VARBnnn
VARBnnn nnn=001-125 Double-word
Numeric
Integer
!VARnnn
VARnnn nnn=001-225 Double-word +-999,999,999
!VARInnn
VARInnn nnn=001-225 Double-word +-2,147,483,647
String !VARSnn
Motor Position !nTPC
VARSnn
MOPn nn=01-50 n=1-8
10 words 0-20 characters
Double-word +-2,147,483,647
Motor Velocity !nTVEL
Encoder Position !nTPE
MOVn
ENPn n=1-8 n=1-8
Double-word
Double-word
Timer
Nnn
!nTTIM
Run
Program
Tn
Nnn n=1 nn=1-50
Double-word 0-999999999
10 words 0-20 characters
If Parker 6K still executes, it will cause a communication time-out.
Parker 6K needs an internal program in order to accept commands with the initial code
“!”, otherwise communication errors may arise.
Register Type Command
Input !nTIN
Output
Alarm Status
!nTOUT
!INTHW
Axis Status
System Status
User Status
Binary
Error Status
RUN
!nTAS
!TSS
!TUS
!VARBnnn
TERn.bb
Run Program
Format Register Range Data Range
In.bb
On.bb
Asn.bb
AXSn.bb
SYSn.bb
n=0-8; bb=1-32 n=1; bb=1-32 n=1-8; bb=1-32 n=1; bb=1-32
Bit
Bit
USSn.bb
n=1; bb=1-16 Bit
VARBnnn.bb
nnn=001-125; bb=1-32 Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
TERn.bb
RUNnn n=1; bb=1-32 nn=1-50
Bit
Bit
Cable Drawing
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format
Communication Format
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
Controller Setting
RS232C
None
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
287
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.39 Side Mida 20/20D
1. Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access:
Word Device and Bit Device.
Register
Display
TC Area
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Wnnnnn nnnn=0-10499 Word (16 bits)
Dispn
Daten n=0-4 n=0-6
10 words
Word
Relay Type Format Relay Range
I/O Relay
Hardware Reset
Software Reset
Clear RAM, EEPROM
Clear database
Bnnn nnn=0-1599
HardRn n=0
SoftRn n=0
Clr0-n
Clr1-n
Clear RAM, EEPROM, database Clr2-n
Clear RAM, EEPROM, database and default setup
Clr3-n n=0 n=0 n=0 n=0
Block
Must be 0 or multiple of 16
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller
Operator terminal to RS485 port on controller
288
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Controller Setting
Format
RS232C
Communication Format RS232C
RS485
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission
Format
Mode
153
9600 bps
Size 7-bits
Parity NONE
Stop bit 1-bit
Stop mode
Operator Terminal Setting
RS232C RS485
RS485
1
9600 bps
8-bits
EVEN
1-bit
Running mode
Use SIDE MIDA
20/20D driver
Use MODBUS
Slave driver
153 1
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
289
290
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.40 Siemens Simatic S5
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input Image
Output Image
Extended I/O
IBnnn
QBnnn
OBnnn
Flag Bits
Peripheral I/O
FBnnn
PBnnn
System Data Area RSnnn
System Data Area RInnn nnn=0-127 nnn=0-127 nnn=0-8191 nnn=0-8191 nnn=0-8191 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Word
Word
System Data Area RJnnn
System Data Area RTnnn
Timer Current Tnnn
Counter Current Cnnn
Data Block nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Word
Word
Word
Word
DBmmm/nnn
DBnnn mmm=0-255; mmm is the block number nnn=0-65535; nnn defines the block.
If mmm is not set, mmm defaults to 3 =
DB3/nnn
Data Block DWmmm/nnn
DWnnn mmm=0-255; mmm is the block number nnn=0-32767; nnn defines the block.
If mmm not set, mmm defaults to 3 =
DW3/nnn
The operator terminal can read up to 30 words in one read command.
Data Size
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Max. 30
Relay Type
Input Image
Output Image
Extended I/O
Flag Bits
Peripheral I/O
Cable Drawing
Format
IBnnn.b
QBnnn.b
OBnnn.b
FBnnn.b
PBnnn.b
Relay Range
nnn=0-127; b=0-7 nnn=0-127; b=0-7 nnn=0-255; b=0-7 nnn=0-255; b=0-7 nnn=0-255; b=0-7
Block
b=0, e.g. IB30.0
b=0, e.g. QB2.0
b=0, e.g. OB0.0
b=0, e.g. FB23.0
b=0, e.g. PB23.0
An RS-232/Current-loop converter cable must be used
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS-232/Current-loop converter COM1 or COM2=>RS232
Station No
Transmission Speed
None
9600 bps
Transmission Format
PLC Mode Code
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Controller’s Data Block n=3-255 must OPEN
PLC MODE CODE
0: 90U 1: 95U
2:100U 3:102U
4:103U 5:115U
6:135U/921 7:135U/922
8:135U/928
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Command Delay Operator terminal Command Delay
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
291
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.41 Siemens Simatic S5 3964R
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Register
Register
Format
nnn mmm/nnn
Register Range
nnn=0-255, data block: set 3 mmm=0-255, nnn=0-255
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Relay
Relay
Format Relay Range Block
nnn.b
nnn=0-255, b=0-f, data block: set 3 b must be 0 mmm/nnn.b
mmm=0-255, nnn=0-255, b=0-f b must be 0
Cable Drawing
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No None
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
292
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.42 Siemens Simatic S7-200 PPI
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input Image
Input Image
Output Image
Output Image
Internal Bits
Internal Bits
Timer
IWn
IDn
QWn
QDn
MWnn
MDnn
Tnnn
Counter
Special S
Special S
Special Bits
Cnnn
SWnn
SDnn
SMWnnn
Special Bits
Special Bits
SMWnnn
SMDnnn
Analog Input Word AIWnn
Analog Output Word AQWnn n=0-14 n=0-12 n=0-14 n=0-12 nn=0-99 nn=0-97 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nn=0-99 nn=0-97 nnn=0-27 nnn=28-199 nnn=0-197 nn=0-30 nn=0-30
Data Area
Data Area
VWnnnn
VDnnnn nnnn=0-9998 nnnn=0-9996
Data Area DBWnnnn nnnn=0-9998
AQW; SW; SD cannot be used in CPU212/214.
Data Size
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Word
Word
Double-word
Word* read only
Word
Double-word
Word* read only
Word* read only
Word
Double-word
Word
Relay Type
Input Image
Output Image
Internal Bits
Timer Bit
Counter Bit
Special Bit
Data Area Bit
Special M
Cable Drawings
Format
In.b
Qn.b
Mnn.b
Tnnn
Cnnn
SMnnn.b
Vnnnn.b
Snn.b
Relay Range
n=0-15; b=0-7 n=0-15; b=0-7 n=0-100; b=0-7 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-200; b=0-7 nnnn=0-999; b=0-7 nn=0-100; b=0-7
Block
b=0 e.g. I3.0
b=0 e.g. Q2.0
b=0 e.g. M0.0
b=0 e.g.T0 *read only b=0 e.g.C0 *read only b=0 e.g. SM23.0
b=0 e.g. V2323.0
b=0 e.g. S25.0
Operator terminal to programming port on controller (RS485 mode)
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
293
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS485C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
02 (02-27)
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Command Delay
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS485: Set SW10=ON
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Operator terminal Command Delay
Note:
The communication mode of the Simatic S7-200 network is a Token Ring structure and can exist in several majors. When on-line, the PC can download from/upload to the controller.
294
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.43 Siemens Simatic S7-300 CP340
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
DBmmm.DBWnnnn mmm=1-255 nnnn=0-8190
DBmmm.DBDnnnn mmm=1-255 nnnn=0-8188
DBmmm.DBWnnnn is the address of a word located at byte #nnnn and the byte following #nnnn of data block #3
Word
DBmmm.DBDnnnn is the address of a double-word located at byte #nnnn and the three bytes following #nnnn of data block #mmm
Double-word
The operator terminal can read up to 32 words in one read command.
Relay Type Format Relay Range
DBmmm.DBXnnnn.b mmm=1-255 DBmmm.DBXnnnn.b is the address of nnnn=0-8191 bit #b of the word located at byte b=0-7 #nnnn of data block #mmm b=0
Block
Cable Drawings
Operator terminal to RS232C port on CP340
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS232=CP340
RS422=CP340
RS485=CP340
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
None
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Function Block
Stop bit: 1-bit
FB40, FB2, FB3, DB2,
DB3 for CP
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS422: Set SW10=OFF
RS485: Set SW10=ON
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
295
296
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.44 Siemens Simatic S7-300 via MPI port
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input Image
Input Image
Output Image
Output Image
IWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
IDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532
QWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
QDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532
Bits
Bits
MWnnn
MDnnn nnnnn=0-254 nnnnn=0-252
Data Area (DB10) VWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
Data Area (DB10) VDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532
Data Area (DB10) DBWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534; the byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make
DBWnnnnn
6
Data Area (DB10) DBDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532; a doubleword address, DBWnnnn &
DBWnnnn+1 make DBDnnnn
7
Data Area DBmmm.
DBWnnnnn mmm=1-255 nnnnn=0-65534
8
Data Area DBmmm.
DBDnnnnn
Tnnnnn mmm=1-255 nnnnn=0-65532 nnnnn=0-65534 Timer
Counter Cnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
Timer and Counter are read-only.
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Device Type/
Aux. Address
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data Size
R/W
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Word
Relay Type Format
Input Image
Output Image
Innnnn.b
Qnnnnn.b
Bit Mnnn.b
Data Area Bit (=DB10) Vnnnnn.b
Relay Range
n=0-100; b=0-7
Device Type/
Aux. Address
Block
R/W
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC0 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC1
0xC2 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC3
0-7
0-7
0-7
0-7
Data Area Bit (=DB10) DBXnnnn.b
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC4 0-7
DB10.DBXnnnnn.b is a bit address, it is in
#b bit of #nnnnn word with DB10
Data Area Bit DBmm.DBXnnnn.b mm=1-31 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7
0xC5 0-7
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Cable Drawing
Operator terminal to MPI port (RS485) on controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS485
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
2
19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS485
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Notes:
1. The cable is the same as for the Siemens Simatic S7 200.
2. The operator terminal and PLC stations are between 0 and 15. The operator terminal station no. is lower than the PLC station.
3. When using a macro, the size of block move is limited to within 10 words.
4. Due to the Token Ring protocol, no error message is generated when removing the cable.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
297
298
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.45 Siemens Simatic S7-300 MPI-Cable
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Input Image
Input Image
Output Image
Output Image
IWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
IDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532
QWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
QDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532
Bits
Bits
MWnnn
MDnnn nnnnn=0-65534 nnnnn=0-65532
Data Area (DB10) VWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534
Data Area (DB10) VDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532
Data Area (DB10) DBWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534; the byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make
DBWnnnnn
6
Data Area (DB10) DBDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65532; a doubleword address, DBWnnnn &
DBWnnnn+1 make DBDnnnn
7
Data Area 8
Data Area
DBmmm.
DBWnnnnn mmm=2-205 nnnnn=0-65534
DBmmm.
DBDnnnnn mmm=2-205 nnnnn=0-65532
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Device Type/
Aux. Address
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Data Size
R/W
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Relay Type
Input Image
Output Image
Bit
Format
Innnnn.b
Qnnnnn.b
Mnnn.b
Data Area Bit (=DB10) Vnnnnn.b
Data Area Bit (=DB10) DBXnnnn.b
Data Area Bit
Relay Range
Device Type/
Aux. Address
Block
R/W
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC0 0-7 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC1 0-7 nnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC2 0-7 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC3 0-7 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 0xC4 0-7
DB10.DBXnnnnn.b is a bit address, it is in
#b bit of #nnnnn word with DB10
0-7
DBmm.DBXnnnn.b mm=2-26 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7
0xC5 0-7
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Cable Drawings
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Operator terminal to MPI cable RS232C port MPI 6ES7-972-0CA21-0XA0
Operator terminal to MPI cable RS232C port HMI 6ES7-972-0CA10-0XA0
Example of connections between operator terminal and S7-300/400 CPU MPI port
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format MPI cable RS232C
Station No 02
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
19200/38400 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Command Delay
Data Block DB10 for S7-300-CPU
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set PLC Station to 02 in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Set operator terminal Command Delay
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
299
300
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.46 Siemens Simatic S7-300 HMI-Cable
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Image
Input Image
Output Image
Output Image
Bits
Bits
Timer Image
IWnnnnn
IDnnnnn
QWnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523 nnnnn=0-65532 length=2-523 nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523
QDnnnnn
MWnnn nnnnn=0-65532 length=2-523 nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-78
MDnnn nnnnn=0-65532 length=2-78
Tnnnnn.10ms
nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Double-word
Word
Timer Image
Timer Image
Timer Image
Counter Image
Tnnnnn.100ms nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523
Tnnnnn.1s
Tnnnnn.10s
Cnnnnn
DBmmm.DBWnnnn mmm=2-205 nnnn=0-65534 nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523 nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523 nnnnn=0-65534 length=2-523
DBmmm.DBDnnnn mmm=2-205 nnnn=0-65532
Word
Word
Word
Word nnnn=0-65534; DBWnnnn is a word address, the byte nnnn & nnnn+1 make DBWnnnn
Word nnnnn=0-65532; DBDnnnn is a doubleword address, DBWnnnn &
DBWnnnn+1 make DBDnnnn
Double-word
Data Area (DB10) DBWnnnnn
Data Area (DB10)
Data Area (DB10)
Data Area (DB10)
DBDnnnnn
VWnnnnn
VDnnnnn nnnnn=0-65534; DBWnnnnn is a word address, the byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make DBWnnnnn
Word nnnnn=0-65532; DBDnnnnn is a double-word address, DBWnnnn &
DBWnnnn+1 make DBDnnnn
Double-word nnnnn=0-65534; VWnnnnn is a word address, the byte nnnnn & nnnnn+1 make DBWnnnnn
Word nnnnn=0-65532; VDnnnnn is a doubleword address, DBWnnnn &
DBWnnnn+1 make DBDnnnn
Double-word
Relay Type
Input Image
Output Image
Bit
Data Area Bit
Data Area Bit
(=DB10)
Data Area Bit
(=DB10)
Format Relay Range Block
Innnnn.b
Qnnnnn.b
Mnnnnn.b
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 b=0, e.g. I3.0
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 b=0, e.g. Q2.0
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 b=0, e.g. M0.0
DBmm.DBXnnnnn.b
mm=2-26 nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 b=0, e.g.
DB22.DBX20.0
DBXnnnnn.b
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 b=0, e.g. DBX23.0
DBX23.0=DB10.DBX23.0
nnnnn=0-65535; b=0-7 b=0, e.g. V23.0
Vnnnnn.b
DB10.DBXnnnnn.b is a bit address, it is in #b bit of #nnnnn word with DB10
V23.0=DB10.DBX23.0
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Cable Drawings
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Operator terminal and RS232C port on HMI 6ES7-972-0CA10-0XA0
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format HMI Cable RS232C
Node Address
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
Open Data Block
Command Delay
02
Stop bit: 1-bit
DB block for S7-300-CPU
COM2 = RS232C
9600/19200/38400 bps Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Set operator terminal Command
Delay
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
301
302
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.47 Taian TP01
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Input Register
Output Register
Special Register
Constant Register
Data Register
Format Register Range
WXnn
WYnn
WSnn
WCnnn
Vnnnn nn=1-24 nn=1-27 nn=1-40
Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits) nnn=1-512 Word (16 bits) nnnn=1-1024 Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Input Relay
Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Cable Drawings
Format Relay Range
Xnnn
Ynnn
Cnnnn nnn=1-384 nn=1-384 nn=1-1024
Block
Must be multiple of 16 + 1
Must be multiple of 16 + 1
Must be multiple of 16 + 1
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
0
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.48 Taian TP02
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device..
Register Type Format
Input Xnnn
Output Register Ynnn
Auxiliary Register Vnnnn
Auxiliary Register Dnnnn
System Register WSnnn
Auxiliary Relay
Register
Cnnnn
Constant Register WCnnn
Register Range Data Size
nnn=1-369 (must be 1 or multiple of 16 + 1) Word nnn=1-369(must be 1 or multiple of 16 + 1) Word nnnn=1-1024 Word nnnn=1-1024 nnn=1-128
Word
Word nnnn=1-2048 (must be 1 or multiple of 16 + 1) Word nnn=1-912 Word
Relay Type Format
Input Xnnn
Output Ynnn
Auxiliary Relay
Special Relay
Cnnnn
SCnnn nnn=1-384 nnn=1-384 nnnn=1-2048 nnn=1-128
Cable Drawings
Relay Range
Operator terminal series to RS422 port on TP02
Operator terminal to RS485 port on TP02
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS422/RS485
Station No 01
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
19200 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 2-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
PLC Station = 01
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
The above Controller Setting is the H-Designer default - please refer to the controller manual.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
303
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
To set up WS041, WS042, WS044, WS045:
WS041---SET RS422, baud rate, data bit, parity, stop bit
WS042---SET RS422 station number
WS044---SET RS485 baud rate, data bit, parity, stop bit
WS045---SET RS485 station number
If TP02 controller RS422 port station no.=01 WS042 set to 01 (decimal), transmission speed (19200 bps) and transmission format (7 bits, Even, 2 bits) WS041 set to 0120 (decimal).
304
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.49 Taian N2
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Function
Format
Fnnn nnn=0-155
Register Range Data Size
Word (16 bits)
Cable Drawings
For connection to the RS232C port, the TAIAN’s FA-RS-232-N2 cable must be used.
For connection to the RS485 port, the TAIAN’s FA-RS-485-KN cable must be used, connected as below:
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
RS485
Station No RS232C=1
RS485=1
Transmission Speed RS232C: 9600 bps
Transmission Format Size RS232C: 7-bit
Parity RS232C: ODD
Stop bit RS232C: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Notes:
1. Unsigned binary object must be used.
2. Even though the F125 can be chosen, it cannot be used. (Display 33333)
3. F0, F21, F42, F63, F84, F105 are quick read/write start positions. (Block sizes are 21, 21, 21, 21, 21, 23.)
4. 33333 represents the Function is reserved.
5. In the Function table, Format and Function values marked * cannot be changed.
6. If editing a double-word object, its value is composed of nearby two values.
(Don’t use.)
7. Please adjust the value of the operator terminal: Command Delay (block read displays 0020 error message).
8. Object, integer, decimal, digit must correspond with reality (unsigned binary object)(refer to the user manual).
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
305
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.50 Telemecanique TSX Micro
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
Internal Word Wnnnn nnnn=0-9999 Word
The operator terminal can read up to 60 words in one read command.
Controller denotation: %MWnnnn.
Data Size
Relay Type Format
Bit of Internal Word Wnnnn:bb
Relay Range
nnnn=0-9999; bb=0-15
Block
bb=00, e.g. W0:0
Notes:
1. The writing unit for a single point bit is 16 bits.
2. When operator terminal changes a relay’s state, the operator terminal must read
1 word (16 bits). After changing the corresponding bit, the operator terminal will write the word to the controller. These actions will take more than one controller scan. The controller ladder cannot control other bits (word) before the operator terminal has completed the “Change the Relay” action, otherwise these bits (word) will return to their initial values. In other words, the controller’s control action will be resumed.
For example: When the operator terminal changes W1234:7, the operator terminal must read the word from W1234:0 toW1234:15. After changing bit 7, the operator terminal will write the word to the controller. If the operator terminal does not write to the controller, the controller ladder has changed W1234:0-
W1234:6 or W1234:8-W1234-15. The operator terminal’s write action will cause the controller control action to resume.
Cable Drawings
Example: Operator terminal COM port to RS232C port
306
Example: Operator terminal COM port to TER RS485 port
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format
Communication Format
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
Controller Setting
RSRS232C/RS485
0-8; Master
9600/19200 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS485: Set SW10=ON
Set operator terminal station to 1-8
SLAVE in H-Designer
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
307
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.51 Toshiba M20/M40
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size
Input Relay Register
Output Relay Register
Internal Relay Register
XWnn
YWnn
RWnn nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nn=0-63
Word
Word
Word
Link Register
Timer Register
Counter Register
Data Register
ZWnn
Tnnn
Cnn
Dnnnn nn=0-31 nnn=0-127 nn=0-95 nnnn=0-1535
Word
Word
Word
Word
The operator terminal can read up to 32 words in one read command.
Relay Type
Input Relay
Output Relay
Internal Relay
Link Relay
Cable Drawings
Format Relay Range
Xnnb
Ynnb
Rnnb
Znnb
Block
nn=0-31; b=0-f b=0 e.g. X10 nn=0-31; b=0-f b=0 e.g. Y00 nn=0-63; b=0-f b=0 e.g. R100 nn=0-31; b=0-f b=0 e.g. Z310
308
Operator terminal to RS422 Computer Link port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format
Programmer/computer link
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
RS422
Computer link can be used
COM2 = RS232C/RS422/RS485
RS422: Set SW10=OFF
RS485: Set SW10=ON
0
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN/ODD/NONE
Stop bit: 1-bit
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.52 Toshiba T1/T2
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range
External Input Register
Output Relay Register
Direct Input Register
Direct Output Register
Auxiliary Relay Register
Special Register
Timer Register
XWnn
YWnn
IWnn
OWnn
RWnnn
SWnnn
Tnnn nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nn=0-63 nnn=0-127 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-255
Counter Register
Data Register
Link Register
Link Relay Register
Cnnn
Dnnnn
Wnnnn
LWnnn nnn=0-255 nnnn=0-4095 nnnn=0-1023 nnn=0-255
File Register Fnnnn nnnn=0-1023
The operator terminal can read up to 32 words in one read command.
Data Size
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Relay Type
External Input Device
Output Relay Device
Direct Input Device
Direct Output Device
Auxiliary Relay Device
Special Device
Timer Device
Counter Device
Link Device
Link Relay
Cable Drawings
Format
Xnnb
Ynnb
Innb
Onnb
Rnnnb
Snnnb
T.nnn
C.nnn
Znnnb
Lnnnb
Relay Range Block
nn=0-63; b=hex number 0-F b=0 e.g. X10 nn=0-63; b=0-f nn=0-63; b=0-f b=0 e.g. Y00 b=0 nn=0-63; b=0-f nnn=0-127; b= 0-f nnn=0-255; b= 0-f nnn=0-255 b=0 b=0 e.g. R100 b=0 e.g. S230 nnn=0-255 nnn=0-511; b= 0-f nnn=0-255; b= 0-f b=0 e.g. Z30 b=0 e.g. L2550
Operator terminal COM port to T1 CPU serial port
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
309
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C
Station No
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
0 =T1
9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: ODD
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
COM1 or COM2 = RS232C
Set PLC Station to 00 in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
310
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.53 Unidriver UD70
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Data Register
Format
#70.00-#70.99
#71.00-#71.99
#72.00-#72.99
#73.00-#73.99
#18.01-#18.30
#19.01-#19.30
#20.01-#20.50
#91.01-#91.10
Register Range
W 0 - W 198
W 200 - W 398
W 400 - W 598
W 600 - W 798
W 800 - W 858
W 860 - W 918
W 920 - W1018
W1020 - W1029
Data Size
Word (32 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Relay Type
Bit Relay
Format
#18.31-#18.50
#19.31-#19.50
Relay Range
B0 - B19
B20 - B39
Block
Cable Drawing
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting Operator Terminal Setting
Communication Format RS485
Station No Set the parameter of
UD70 address #14.01 to 11
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
Mode
9600 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Set the parameter of
UD70 address#14.02 to 06
RS485
Set PLC Station to 11 in
H-Designer.
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
311
312
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.54 Vigor M
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type
Input Relay
Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
Step Relay
Special Relay
Data
Special Data
Timer Register
Counter Register
Counter Register
Format
Xnnn
Ynnn
Mnnnn
Snnn
Mnnnn
Dnnnn
Dnnnn
Tnnn
Cnnn
Cnnn
Register Range Data Size
nnn=0-777, oct., 0 or multiple of 8 Byte nnn=0-777, oct., 0 or multiple of 8 Byte nnnn=0-5119 0 or multiple of 8 Byte nnn=0-999 0 or multiple of 8 Byte
Nnnn=9000-9255 0 or multiple of 8 Byte nnn= 0-8191 nnnn= 9000-9255
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits) nnn= 0-255 nnn= 0-199 nnn= 200-255
Word (16 bits)
Word (16 bits)
Word (32 bits)
Relay Type
Input Relay
Output Relay
Auxiliary Relay
ST1 Status
Special Relay
Timer Relay
Counter Relay
Timer Coil
Counter Coil
Cable Drawings
Format
Xnnn
Ynnn
Mnnnn
Snnn
Mnnnn
Tnnn
Cnnn
TCnnn
CCnnn
Relay Range
nnn=0-777, oct.
nnn=0-777, oct.
nnnn=0-5119 nnn=0-999
Nnnn=9000-9255 nnn= 0-255 nnnn= 0-255 nnn= 0-255 nnn= 0-199
Block
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Must be 0 or multiple of 8
Operator terminal to RS232C port on controller with 4-pin male connector
Operator terminal to RS422 port on controller
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C, RS422
Station No RS232C=0
RS422=1
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
19200 bps
Size: 7-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
RS232C=0
RS422=1
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
313
314
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
9.55 Yokogawa FA-M3
Data format and range of the controller registers which H-Designer can access: Word
Device and Bit Device.
Register Type Format Register Range Data Size Example
Input Relay
Output Relay
Intern Relay
Xnnnnn nnnnn=201-65499 (not continue) Word (16 bits) X00201
Ynnnnn nnnnn=201-65499 (not continue) Word (16 bits) Y00201
Innnnn nnnnn=1-16384 Word (16 bits) I00001
Common Relay Ennnn
Link Relay Lnnnnn nnnn=1-4096 nnnnn=1-65499 (not continue)
Word (16 bits) E0001
Word (16 bits) L00001
Special Relay
Preset Timer
Mnnnn
TPnnnn nnnn=1-9984 nnnn=1-3072
Word (16 bits) M0001
Word (16 bits) TP0001
Set Timer TSnnnn nnnn=1-3072
Preset Counter CPnnnn nnnn=1-3072
Set Counter
Data Register
CSnnnn
Dnnnn nnnn=1-3072 nnnn=1-8192
Word (16 bits) TS0001
Word (16 bits) CP0001
Word (16 bits) CS0001
Word (16 bits) D0001
File Register
Link Register
Bnnnnn nnnnn=1-32768 Word (16 bits) B00001
Wnnnn nnnnn=1-65499 (not continue) Word (16 bits) W00001
Special Register Znnn
Index Register Vnn nnn=1-512 nn= 1-64
Word (16 bits) Z001
Word (16 bits) V01
Common Register Rnnnn nnnn= 1-4096 Word (16 bits) R0001
The last two digits of the X and Y addresses must be multiples of 16 + 1. The I, E, L, and
M addresses must be multiples of 16 + 1.
One communication can READ/WRITE up to 60 words.
Relay Type Format Relay Range Data Size
Input Relay
Output Relay
Xnnnnn nnnnn=201-65499 (not continue) Bit
Ynnnnn nnnnn=201-65499 (not continue) Bit
Intern Relay Innnnn nnnn=1-16384
Common Relay Ennnn nnnn=1-4096
Bit
Bit
Link Relay
Special Relay
Lnnnnn nnnn=1-65499
Mnnnn nnnn=1-9984
Timer TUnnnn nnnn=1-3072
Counter CUnnnn nnnn=1-3072
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
The last two digits of the X, Y, and L addresses must be multiples of 16 + 1. The I, E, and M addresses must be multiples of 16 +1.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Cable Drawings
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
Operator terminal to RS232 port on controller - YOKOGAWA’s CABLE must be used
Operator terminal to RS485 port on controller
Communication Format
Before connection, please set up the communication parameters and the DIP switch as follows:
Format Controller Setting
Communication Format RS232C/RS485
Station No RS232C=1
RS485=1
Transmission Speed
Transmission Format
RS232C=9600 bps
Size: 8-bit
Parity: EVEN
Stop bit: 1-bit
Operator Terminal Setting
RS232C=1 (based on CPU slot 1-4)
RS485=1
Set the SW5=OFF if parameters are set in H-Designer.
Set the SW5=ON if parameters are set in the operator terminal.
Note:
Operator terminal station no. must match YOKOGAWA controller CPU slot no. If CPU plugs in the first slot, the operator terminal station no. must be set to 1.
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
315
Communication between Operator Terminal and Controller
316
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
10 Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
The following table summarizes the H-Designer features and operator terminal models.
H-T60b H-T60c
H-Designer Feature
Ethernet
Printer
Upload Application
Upload/Download Recipes
Reconstruct Source
Auxiliary Keys
Contrast Adjustment
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Turn off Backlight
Set Time & Date
Character Entry
List and Drop-down List
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Numeric Display
Time, Date, and Day of Week
Display
Historical Display
Alarm Display
Macro
Ladder
Multi-Link
(One master, Slaves)
Cross-Link (Mutual Read) No
Multi-Channel Communication No
Logging Buffer
Common Key
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Slave Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Slide-out Menu
System Messages
Off-line/On-line Simulation
View/Edit Recipes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
H-K30 H-T50
S P N S P N
No No Yes No No Yes
No Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
317
Appendix A - H-Designer Features and Operator Terminal Models
318
Beijer Electronics, MA00822
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project